2009 Additives Handbook
by Dr. Darlene Brezinski
Dr. Joseph V. Koleske
Robert Springate
June 1, 2009
The
Additives Handbook is available on CD. Normally $29.95,
the
Handbook can be purchased for $19.95 (plus shipping) until
September
15. Contact Andrea Kropp at kroppa@pcimag.com to
purchase
your copy. The entire Additives Handbook can be viewed below.
Additives belong to a broad and diffuse category of key components in a
coating formulation. They comprise a small percentage in that formulation,
usually less than 5%, but their impact is significant. Additive function is
almost always very specific in nature. Some additives are multi-purpose; for
example, they may be important to the manufacturing process as well as to the
coating’s performance. Occasionally the use of one additive will require the
use of another to counter some undesirable effect of the
first.
Some additives are proprietary products with
highly specific functions that work well in some systems but cannot be used in
others. In addition, because of the proprietary nature of many additives, their
chemical composition is not disclosed. This can make general recommendations
difficult. In addition, this lack of structural knowledge means that additive
substitutions cannot be made on the basis of fundamental structural
chemistry.
In recent years the focus on green technology, lower cost and safer products
has led to the introduction of newer additives and chemistries. With a large
number of additives available for a particular problem, formulators can find
themselves in trouble if the wrong additive is initially selected or added to
alleviate or correct a problem. Correct additive selection is important to
success, and such selection is made through vendor assistance or years of
experience.
The following is a brief description of various coating additives along with
some generic examples. The majority of additive types are represented.
ABRASION-RESISTANCE IMPROVERS
See Slip Aid, Nanotechnology <
Abrasion is a phenomenon caused by the mechanical action of rubbing,
scraping or erosion. It has two forms, marring or wearing. Mar abrasion is the
permanent deformation of a surface, but the deformation does not break the
surface. Wear abrasion is removal of a portion of the surface by some kind of
mechanical action: wind erosion, sliding back and forth of an object, wear of
tires on traffic paint, and so on. The surface removal is gradual and progressive
in nature. Abrasion resistance is a combination of basic factors such as
elasticity, hardness, strength (both cohesive, tensile and shear strength),
toughness, and, especially in the case of wear resistance, thickness. In
addition, abrasion resistance is intimately related to scratching and slip.
Thus, compounds that enhance these properties will improve abrasion
resistance.
The nature of the polymeric resin and the pigments affect abrasion resistance.
In the case of the pigments, it should be noted that extender pigments are
noted for their ability to contribute to a variety of mechanical properties.
Examples of compounds that have been used to enhance abrasion resistance include: silica glass spheres,
specialty glass spheres such as UVT™ Sunspheres, and similar compounds that improve hardness. Certain silicones and
other oils will decrease surface friction,
making it easier for objects to slide over the surface and thus reduce wear abrasion. Increasing crosslink
density by use of higher functionality oligomers and/or larger amounts
of crosslinking agents has been used to improve abrasion
resistance.
Waxes have also been used to improve slip and thereby abrasion. Hard waxes
resist abrasion better than soft materials. Both PE and PTFE waxes function by
the ball bearing mechanism, while the softer microcrystalline waxes work via
the layer (bloom) mechanism.
The use of nano-sized materials in coating formulations can significantly
improve scratch resistance. These improvements can be used in clear topcoats,
ink over-print varnishes and pigmented finishes. The commercial availability of
nanoparticles allows formulators to obtain new properties that were
unachievable in the past, not only in scratch resistance but many other
physical performance attributes.
For nanoparticles to be of use in transparent coatings, it is critical that
aggregates present in the powder be dispersible to their primary particle size
in the coating formulation to avoid rapid settling and excessive light
scattering. In addition, it is critical that the dispersed primary particles
avoid re-aggregation during the coating curing process.
Thousands of scratch-resistant coating applications are present in our everyday
lives. Examples of these applications include coatings for wood floors, safety
glasses, electronic displays, automotive finishes and polycarbonate panels.
Improving the mar, scratch and/or abrasion resistance in these transparent coating
applications is a major challenge, particularly with regard to not affecting
the other performance attributes of the coating.
Inorganic
Fillers
Incorporation of inorganic fillers into coatings to improve mechanical
properties is well known. Drawbacks associated with this approach can include
loss of transparency, reduced coating flexibility, loss of impact resistance,
increase in coating viscosity and appearance of defects. To overcome these
defects, a filler material should impart improved scratch resistance without
causing the aforementioned drawbacks. Nanomaterials have the potential to
overcome many of these drawbacks because of their inherent small size and
particle morphology.
Maintaining transparency in a coating containing inorganic filler particles is
a challenge. Four properties dictate the degree of transparency in a composite
material: film thickness, filler concentration, filler particle size, and the
difference in refractive index between the bulk coating and the filler
particle.
Silica particles, colloidal or fumed, and clays are among the most widely
studied inorganic fillers for improving the scratch/abrasion resistance of
transparent coatings. These fillers are attractive from the standpoint that they
do not adversely impact the transparency of coatings due to the fact that the
refractive indices of these particles (fumed silica = 1.46; bentonite clay =
1.54) closely match those of most resin-based coatings. The drawback to
silica-based fillers is that high concentrations of the particles are generally
required to show a significant improvement in the scratch/abrasion resistance
of a coating, and these high loadings can lead to various other formulation
problems associated with viscosity, thixotropy and film
formation.
Alumina
The use of alumina particles in transparent coatings is much more
limited even though alumina is significantly harder than silica-based materials
and, as a scratch- and abrasion-resistant filler, higher performance at lower
loadings is often observed. For alumina particle sizes greater than 100 nm, the
high refractive index (1.72) results in significant light scattering and a hazy
appearance in most clear coatings. Currently, only high-refractive-index coatings,
such as the melamine-formaldehyde resins used in laminate production, can use
submicron alumina for scratch resistance and maintain
transparency.
To use alumina as a scratch-resistant filler in transparent coatings, the
particle size must be sufficiently small to overcome its refractive index
mismatch. A Physical Vapor Synthesis (PVS) process has been developed that
allows production of nonporous crystalline metal oxides having primary particle
sizes less than 100 nm at economically viable rates with essentially no
byproducts or waste streams.
Two grades of aluminum oxide can be produced
using the PVS process: NanoTek™ and
NanoDur™ alumina. Both grades feature a mixture of γ- and δ-crystal phases and
are spherical in shape, but the grades differ in terms of primary particle
size. NanoTek alumina has a surface area of 35 m2/g corresponding to
a mean particle size of 48 nm, whereas NanoDur alumina has a surface area of 45
m2/g with a mean particle size of 37 nm.
There is a proprietary particle dispersion stabilization process that
involves specific surface treatments designed to yield nanoparticles that are
compatible with a variety of different coating formulations. For example,
stable dispersions of metal oxide nanoparticles can be prepared in solvents
such as water, alcohols, polar and nonpolar hydrocarbons, plasticizers, and
even directly in acrylate monomers with the appropriate surface-treatment
process. These surface treatments allow solids levels of up to 60 wt% to be
dispersed, and yet maintain a sufficiently low viscosity for ease of
blending.
The use of highly concentrated, non-aggregated nanoparticle dispersions allows
incorporation of the nanoparticles into a coating formulation without
substantial dilution of the formulation with the dispersion liquid. This
feature is particularly important in 100%-solids coating formulations wherein
the nanoparticle is dispersed in one of the reactive
monomers.
Within a given coating class, formulations that result in harder/stiffer
coatings tend to show greater improvement with alumina incorporation than
formulations that lead to softer/more elastomeric coatings. In addition,
transparent coating formulations that exhibit crosslinking upon curing, such as
UV-curable, 2K polyurethane, and melamine-based coatings, show greater
improvement in their scratch resistance upon alumina nanoparticle incorporation
compared to transparent coatings that do not crosslink but rather coalesce,
such as emulsion-based coatings.
SNC
SNC is an abbreviation for silica nanocomposites that are composed of
colloidal silica particles with an organic surface modification. These
particles, which improve the scratch and abrasion resistance of a
variety of coatings including radiation-curable formulations, are produced by a
unique process that results in monodispersed, non-agglomerating spheres with a
diameter of about 20 nm. The flexible manufacturing process is also
capable of producing a broad range of cationic (epoxide) and free-radical
(acrylate) radiation-curable oligomeric composite materials. These
products are stable, transparent and have low viscosity, even at a silica
loading of 60%.
Nanoscale materials for coatings also include complex silicon oxides and
aluminum silicates. Nanoparticles of these materials have been incorporated
into automotive coating formulations that have good sag resistance. The cured
coatings have excellent chip and scratch resistance, outstanding appearance,
superior sandability, and resistance to water spotting and acid etching. Some
properties, such as scratch resistance, are maintained after accelerated
weathering.
Sol-gel
It is also possible to improve the scratch- and
wear-resistance properties of a coating as well as its
photostability/weatherability by the addition of nanoparticles prepared by
sol-gel processing. This method has the advantage in that it starts from
existing, well-developed formulations to which a sol containing nanoparticles
is added. After curing, the modified systems give transparent coatings with
high wear and scratch resistance.
Very
often, hybrid (organic-inorganic) materials are produced by sol-gel. The most
common way to produce nanocomposites is to form, in-situ, an inorganic phase by
hydrolysis and condensation of alkoxides or alkoxysilanes. A further curing
results in covalent bonding between the organic and inorganic phase.
ABSORBENTS
Absorption is a process wherein a material is
taken up and held, or retained, by another material. The material taken up is
called the “absorbate” and the material that retains the material from the
absorption process is called the “absorbent.” Thus, absorbents are materials
that are able to take up another material with the formation of a homogeneous
mixture. For example, cotton fibers will take up moisture, charcoal will take up
a gas, baking soda will take up odors, silica gels will take up moisture;
certain pigments, clays or extenders will take up oils and others will take up
moisture; and so on. This should be contrasted with adsorption, which is a
surface phenomenon and wherein adsorbed molecules can have markedly different
properties than those of absorbed molecules. Compounds such as zeolites or
molecular sieves are adsorbents that take up compounds by the adsorption
process (See Moisture Scavenger).
ACCELERATORS
See Hardeners
These products increase the epoxy-amine reaction
rate and subsequently reduce the possibility of undesired blushing or blooming
reactions. Controlled use of the amount and type of accelerator ensures minimal
impact on the cured binder performance. Although there are numerous products
capable of accelerating epoxy-amine reactions, the most commonly used are:
tertiary amines (e.g., DMP-30 = 2,4,6-tris-[dimethylaminomethyl]-phenol),
phenol derivatives (e.g., nonylphenol), alcohols (e.g., benzyl alcohol) or
acids (e.g., salicylic acid). Be aware that adding accelerator will
significantly reduce the pot-life of the binder system.
ACID CATALYSTS
See Catalysts
Acid catalysts are used to accelerate chemical reactions. Strong acids
such as p-toluene sulfonic acid (PTSA) are frequently used. Also used are
catalysts based on dodecylbenzene sulfonic acid (DDBSA) and
hexafluorophosphoric acid. In using strong acids as catalysts, acid strength
does not necessarily influence the cure rate but it does affect some film
properties. The most widely used of the strong acids is PTSA. Weaker acids,
such as butylphosphoric, those based on aromatic phosphates and various
carboxylic acids, are also used in some coatings systems. Blocked acid
catalysts are also used for many crosslinking reactions.
ACID SCAVENGERS
Acid scavengers remove the small amounts of acid
that are formed during the lifetime of a coating or ink. For example, when
vinyl copolymers are aged small amounts of hydrochloric acid are formed as they
age. An acid scavenger reacts with the acid, which removes it from the system
so it cannot cause harm to the coating, substrate or abutting objects.
Compounds such as cycloaliphatic epoxides and soybean oil epoxide, which
readily react with strong acids, are examples of acid scavengers.
ADHESION PROMOTERS
See Coupling Agents
Adhesion promoters improve a coating’s ability
to withstand mechanical separation from a substrate. That is, they improve
adhesive strength. Quite often these compounds contain two different functional
ends, one of which will interact with the substrate and the other that will
interact with the coating binder. Examples of the various coupling agents are
the silanes, which are trihydrolyzable; the titanates, which can be mono-, di-,
and tetrahydrolyzable; and the chromiums, which are complex in
nature.
For
metal surfaces that are to be coated, this is particularly important because
metals, as a class, are unstable. The pure metal is always oxidizing to the
metal oxide on the surface of the metal substrate. Exposure to moisture, oxygen
and salts accelerates the process. Almost all coatings contain microvoids
through which oxygen, small molecules like water, and ionic materials can
diffuse. If the coating can remain bonded to the metal, then the damage done by
these diffuse agents will be nonexistent. In other words, corrosion can be
prevented. It is, therefore, very important to do all that is possible to
maximize adhesion.
For some materials this involves a mechanical roughening of the substrate
surface to increase the surface area for physical absorption. Chemical
pretreatments such as zinc/iron phosphate and various other materials have also
been used because tightly bound phosphated surfaces will retard access to the
metal and, therefore, impede corrosion.
Typically, organofunctional silanes have been used in coatings as adhesion
promoters because they provide a polar functional group to contribute to
increased bonding to a mineral substrate. They also are hydrolyzable and
provide wetting ability and surface activity. The silanes are moisture
sensitive and will hydrolyze over time to silanols. This is not a problem in
solventborne coatings systems but can cause problems for waterborne systems.
The silanes react with both the polymer and the substrate to form covalent
bonds across the interface. Silane adhesion promoters are used in urethane,
epoxy, acrylic and latex systems.
Receptive inorganic surfaces are those that
have hydroxyl groups attached to elements such as Si, Al, Ti and Fe.
Nonreceptive surfaces, such as boron, and alkaline earth oxides, do not form
stable covalent bonds with silanols. A number of different commercial silane
coupling agents are used in coatings. Levels that range from 0.05-1.0% are
generally effective.
Methacrylic phosphate monomers that improve adhesion to metal, concrete,
glass and other inorganic substrates and that can be used in both water- and
solventborne formulations are available. Some methacrylic phosphate monomers
improve metal adhesion and also significantly improve corrosion resistance.
There are also acrylic phosphate functional monomers that improve adhesion to
various metal substrates. The acrylic reactive group provides a higher reaction
rate in UV- and EB-curable applications.
Other adhesion promoters that are in the
marketplace are titanates (such as isopropyl tris-[N-ethylaminoethylamino]
titanate), zircoaluminates, zirconates, aryl/alkyl phosphate esters and
proprietary metal organic compounds. The titanates and zirconates suffer from
moisture sensitivity as well, so caution is necessary when using them with
waterborne systems. Neo-alkoxy products are claimed to not have this problem.
Alkyl/aryl phosphate esters, zircoaluminates and the metal organic promoters
are stable in waterborne coatings. They are quite different in chemical nature
and therefore the formulator needs to evaluate them separately.
Epoxy/methoxy functional additives are effective in promoting adhesion
of a variety of coating systems to glass, aluminum and steel.
Methacrylate/methoxy functional additives improve adhesion of free radical
cured resins, such as polyacrylates, to inorganic substrates. Epoxy functional
silanes improve adhesion and water resistance of a variety of coating systems
to inorganic substrates. Amine/methoxy functional additives improve adhesion
and water resistance of coatings and adhesives when bonded to glass or metal
substrates.
Powder
Coatings
The same precautions regarding clean substrates and pretreatments that
apply to liquid coatings are advised for powder coatings. Adhesion promoters
such as the silanes and titanates may also be used to enhance adhesion. Silanes
designed for use in powder coatings have an organo functionality that has an
affinity for the powder resin system. The organo-silane must orient itself at
the coating-substrate interface. The choice of organo-silane is usually
governed by the resin system, and experimental screening is advised to
determine which promoter provides the most improvement. Adhesion promoter types
commonly used in powder include mercapto-silanes, amino-silanes,
carboxyl/hydroxyl-silanes, and carboxyl-silanes.
Plastic
Substrates
Due to high chemical stability, low price, excellent balance of physical
properties, possible recycling, etc., the amount of polypropylene (PP) and
thermoplastic olefin (TPO) consumed by automotive parts, household electrical
appliances and molded general goods businesses is increasing. However, PP and
TPO are materials with low surface energy that make painting and adhesion
problematic, hence chlorinated polyolefin (CPO) has found wide use as an
adhesion promoter. Solventborne CPOs have traditionally been used. Excellent
adhesion between TPO substrates and CPO can be obtained as the result of good
wetting and higher dispersion interaction, which are affected by the properties
of the CPO’s chlorine content, crystallinity, melting temperature, molecular
weight and its polydispersity.
There are several factors that can affect the performance of a CPO-based
adhesion promoter. Application parameters play a significant role in designing
a system that will provide optimum adhesion performance. Of particular
importance is the temperature at which a coating applied to a PP or TPO part is
cured or baked. In addition, substrate and CPO composition can influence
overall adhesion performance.
Coating bake temperature is the temperature at which the coating applied to the
TPO part is cured. Coating bake temperature can have an effect on the
interaction between a CPO-based adhesion promoter and the surface of TPO, which
can affect performance. For best results, coating adhesion is enhanced when the
coated TPO parts are baked at temperatures over 100 ˚C, given the same coating
type. However, CPO-based adhesion promoters are successfully used in
applications, such as automotive refinish applications, where the coating is
air-dried or baked at temperatures lower than 100 ˚C.
The chemical and physical properties of the
CPO can also have a significant effect on adhesion performance. Addition of
co-resins to CPOs can enhance adhesion, reduce blistering, and improve the
appearance of coatings applied over the adhesion promoter layer. CPOs have
limited compatibility with most resin types, but unlike conventional coatings
this may not be detrimental to performance. CPOs promote adhesion best when
they are at the interface of the substrate and the coating applied over the
substrate. This means that a formulated adhesion promoter system with a CPO and
borderline compatible co-resin may actually allow the CPO to reach the
interface more readily. A number of co-resin types can be used with CPO,
including acrylic, acrylic-modified alkyds, polyesters and others. The level of
CPO used in the formulation will be dependant upon the substrate, coating type
and required performance properties.
Research efforts are focused on
waterborne coatings applicable to TPO substrates that coalesce well at baking
temperatures as low as, or lower than, 80 ˚C (176 ˚F) in order to save energy
costs and to avoid thermal deformation of TPO substrates at the higher
temperatures. Chlorine-free adhesion promoters are also being used and are
highly desirable.
ALGAECIDES
See Biocides/Fungicides
Chemical agents used to destroy algae. Algae are
chlorophyll-containing plants whose green color is often masked by a brown or
red pigment. Representative compounds include gluteraldehyde, methylenebis
(thiocyanate), quaternary ammonium compounds and zinc oxide.
ANTI-BLOCKING AGENT
Additive used to prevent the undesirable
sticking together or adhesion of painted surfaces under moderate pressure, or
specified conditions of pressure, temperature and humidity; or during storage,
manufacture, or use. Blocking is a measure of the coating’s ability to resist
adhesion to itself (on another freshly coated surface) or adhesion to other
substrates, for example, weather-stripping, doors, hardware etc. A well-known
example of blocking is when a freshly painted window frame is too rapidly
closed. Sometimes it can be very difficult to open the window
again.
Blocking
is a key performance parameter for architectural application and, for
industrial and OEM applications, block resistance is important in the
manufacture of roll stock that will be unrolled at a later date. It is also
important for reducing the need for storage space for freshly painted parts.
ASTM D 4949 may be used to measure blocking performance. Factors affecting
blocking include the coating surface free energy, topography of the coating,
the hardness and the Tg of the polymer.
One approach to improve the block resistance of a coating is to introduce a
surface-active agent that will bloom to the top – the air interface – of a film
as it dries/cures.
Carbinol-functional silicone polyether
copolymers impart mar resistance and anti-blocking properties in addition to
leveling and wetting. Methacrylate functional silicone polyether copolymers
provide consistent and long-lasting slip, mar resistance and anti-blocking to
UV-cured coatings.
Fluorochemical additives can be mixed into coating formulations, often
as post-adds, and migrate to the air interface where they can provide effective
protection where it is most needed, without affecting recoat adhesion. Common
applications include latex semi- and high-gloss architectural paints used on
doors and window trim, and applications where painted parts are stacked for
shipping.
Waxes decrease blocking so that unwanted transfer or adhesion to a contacted
surface is prevented. This can be very important for materials that are coated,
dried and stacked for storage and shipping. Waxes can be used in any type of
coating that could benefit from mar resistance and/or a slip aid. Both water-
and solventborne metal coatings benefit from added lubricity and abrasion
resistance. HDPE, paraffin and Carnauba waxes are typically used to counteract
blocking. Anti-blocking agents are also very useful for any type of items that
are coated, dried and immediately stacked or rolled up for storage or
shipment.
It should be noted that anti-blocking additives, since they tend to gather near
the top surface of a film can change the appearance of a film – the gloss
level. The type of paint is also a variable.
ANTI-CRATERING AGENT
A chemical additive used to prevent the formation of small, bowl-shaped
depressions in a coating film. Very small areas of contamination that have a
low surface tension will produce a surface energy gradient that pulls the
coating away from the contaminant. As a result, the coating film is left with a
roughly rounded depression or a “fish eye” as some surface defects are known.
Related phenomena caused by surface energy gradients are picture framing,
Bénard cell formation, orange peel, edge-pull and picture framing. In general,
such defects are caused by the fact that the coating will flow from a
low-surface-energy area to a high (relatively)-surface-energy area. A variety
of surfactants will alleviate or remove this problem, but the fluorochemical
surfactants are particularly effective in many cases.
ANTI-CRAWLING AGENT
A chemical additive that prevents the wet coating film from receding
from small contaminated or otherwise altered areas of the substrate, leaving
the area with only a very thin coating and often having the appearance of being
uncoated.
ANTI-FLOAT AGENT
A chemical added to single- or multi-color pigmented coatings that
prevents the separating or floating apart of one or more pigments from the
other. This prevents a streaked or mottled effect in the final film. The effect
may happen even if a single pigment is used if the particle sizes of the
pigment are varied over a broad range.
ANTI-FLOODING AGENT
A chemical added to a multi-pigmented coating that prevents the
separation and concentration of one pigment at the surface of the film upon drying
or in a dispersion.
The terms flooding and floating are often
used interchangeably within the industry but they are distinct events. Both
events occur in the liquid coating phase. Some have referred to flooding as
being a horizontal separation of the pigments as opposed to floating, which is
a vertical separation. Some also refer to floating as being a problem on the
surface of the film as opposed to flooding, which occurs beneath the surface of
the film.
The terms are not standardized and both are the result of an uneven
distribution of the pigment that appears in the film as it is drying. Some also
use the term floating to describe a mottled effect and the term flooding to
describe a surface color that is uniform but darker or lighter in color than it
should be.
ANTI-FOAMING AGENT
See Defoamer, Foam Control
An anti-foam additive is used in coatings manufacture to prevent the
formation of foam, or it is added to a mixture to destabilize foam and act as a
bubble breaker, breaking the foam that has already formed.
The terms ‘defoamer’ and ‘antifoaming’ agents are often used interchangeably.
In fact, they are not quite the same. A defoamer is a surface-active agent that
stops the foam and breaks the bubble once it has been formed. It is a bubble
breaker. An antifoaming agent prevents the formation of foam so it never forms.
The term ‘foam-control agent’ is a more appropriate term to use and they
function by a variety of mechanisms to prevent or rupture
foam.
Quite often defoamers are proprietary blends of various ingredients such as
mineral oils, organic solids and surface-active compounds; fatty oils,
surfactants and silica derivatives; alcohols, silica derivatives and
surface-active compounds; esters, mineral oils and silica derivatives; and the
like. Such blends are compounded for special problems such
as:
- quick foam
“knock-down” coupled with long-lasting foam prevention in latex manufacture and
latex coatings;
- controlling foam in
stripping operations;
- foam control in food
applications where FDA product acceptability is needed;
- foam control in paper
coating and dyestuff applications;
- foam elimination in
effluent systems;
- prevent air entrainment
and/or facilitate air release from coatings during the filtration and filling
processes;
- prevention of foam
formation during roller application of architectural
coatings;
- aid in the breaking of
bubbles formed during roller application of latex coatings;
and
- prevention of air
entrainment in flash tanks and stripping columns.
With such product and specific end-use complexity, it is desirable to contact a
supplier for product suggestions, point of application and amounts needed to
efficiently eliminate difficulties.
ANTIFOULING AGENTS
These additives protect underwater marine hulls from harmful effects of
marine life in coastal areas. Antifouling paint is used to protect the bottoms
of ships against living organisms that attach themselves to the hull. These
organisms cause reduced slippage (the ship advances more slowly and consumes
more fuel) and can increase the weight of the ship, thereby affecting safety.
Although they keep algae and barnacles from attaching to ship bottoms,
tin-based antifouling agents have an impact on other marine
organisms.
For years in the marine industry, the use of tributyltin (TBT) with cuprous
oxide was an effective antifouling system that deterred algae, barnacles and
other organisms from adhering to the ship’s hull. However, TBT is being phased
out of use because of safety concerns for a variety of marine life and its long
half-life that causes it to accumulate in the environment. There are a number
of co-biocides used with cuprous oxide that are replacing the TBT-based
systems. These include zinc and copper pyrithione and isothiazolinone
(4,5-dichloro-2-n-octyl-4-isothiazolin-3-one)-based products. All of these
co-biocide antifoulants have been used successfully in Japan for many
years.
Cuprous oxide is a fungicide that deters attachment of marine organisms such as
barnacles and mussels and thus is an active ingredient in antifouling paint. It
is typically used with other co-biocides to enhance paint performance and
improve the coating’s resistance against algae and slime attachment. The use of
an algicidal co-biocide minimizes the attachment of algae and grasses to the
coating surface.
The International Maritime Organization (IMO),
in late 2001, approved a ban on the application of antifouling marine paints
containing organotins such as TBT, beginning on January 1, 2003. The IMO
agreement also required removal or sealing of all TBT-based coatings from
vessels by Jan. 1, 2008. The actions affect all vessels engaged in
international voyages. For more information, see the following website:
www.antifoulingpaint.com.
Tin-free products have been on the market for more than 10 years, and
marine paint companies offer the same performance guarantee as given with the
tin-containing coatings. While most ships dry-dock every three years or less,
some owners want a dry-dock interval of five years. Several of the new
self-polishing systems can now meet that five- year standard ensuring most, if
not all, marine markets can be serviced using a tin-free product. Registration
requirements in the United States and Europe mean the new tin-free products
have already undergone significant testing that show they are environmentally
preferable to TBT.
With the approval at IMO of a ban on antifouling systems using organotins
acting as biocides, a significant amount of work is being done on new
antifouling systems. The goal is to find a renewable, natural material that is
safe to humans and not harmful to the environment. See also Biocides/Fungicides.
ANTI-FREEZING AGENT
A chemical that will prevent freezing or damage resulting from the
freezing and thawing of a coating’s composition. Typical examples are ethylene
and propylene glycol.
ANTI-GELLING AGENT
A chemical that prevents the progressive, irreversible increase in consistency
of a pigment-vehicle composition usually caused by an interaction between the
vehicle and pigment, reaction between resin and solvent, or polymerization of
the vehicle.
ANTI-LIVERING AGENT
A chemical that prevents the progressive, irreversible increase in
consistency of a pigment-vehicle composition, usually caused by an interaction
between the vehicle and pigment, or polymerization of the
vehicle.
Livering is the slow, irreversible change that increases the consistency of a
formulated (pigment-vehicle combination) coating. It usually results from a
strong interaction between the vehicle and the pigment or other solid,
dispersed material. However, it can be caused by a slow polymerization of the
vehicle and entrainment of the pigment or filler. Livering often can be seen as
a thick skin covering the surface of previously opened and stored cans of
paint.
ANTI-MARRING AGENT
A chemical or composition that will enhance the ability of a coating to
resist damage caused by light abrasion, impact or pressure. Silicone polyether
copolymers impart mar resistance, improve leveling and reduce cratering,
pinholing, orange peel and cissing. Carbinol functional silicone polyether
copolymers impart mar resistance and anti-blocking properties in addition to
leveling and wetting. Methacrylate functional silicone polyether copolymers
provide consistent and long-lasting slip, mar resistance and anti-blocking to
UV-cured coatings. Waxes are frequently used to improve mar resistance.
(See Slip-Aid and Abrasion-Resistance for more discussion.)
ANTIMICROBIAL AGENT
See Biocides/Fungicides
ANTIOXIDANT
A chemical compound that prevents oxygen from reacting with other
compounds that are susceptible to oxidation. Antioxidants are additives that
are expected to prolong the lifetime of a coating and thus assist in
maintaining its original high-performance characteristics as long as possible.
Components of a coating, adhesive, ink or sealant are subjected to
opportunities for degradation during component manufacture, storage, and
transportation as well as during application and final use.
The cause of degradation is almost always by oxygen or UV radiation attack (see UV Absorbers and Light Stabilizers).
Oxygen attack can be by oxygen or ozone and it may occur under ambient or
elevated temperature conditions. At elevated temperatures antioxidants decrease
thermal oxidation and formation of peroxide radicals that, in turn, can cause
formation of colored chromophores and/or other deleterious changes in coating
properties.
Effective antioxidants include the p-phenylenediamine derivatives such as the
N,N´-diaryl, the N,N´-alkyl-aryl, and the N,N´-dialkyl compounds, but these
compounds have a tendency to discolor or scorch during cure. Also effective and
widely used are the hindered phenolic compounds, such as
2,6-di-t-butyl-4-methylphenol (BHT), octyl and certain higher alkyl phenols,
phosphites, and synergists which are mixtures of antioxidants that act in a
synergistic manner. Antioxidants are usually used in a concentration range of
0.1-0.5%, and they are consumed in the stabilization
process.
For powder coatings, the purpose of the antioxidant is to minimize thermal
degradation of the polymer in the coating. Thermal degradation causes yellowing
and a reduction in mechanical and chemical properties. Usually hindered phenols
are used as primary antioxidants. Organo-phosphites are sometimes used as
secondary antioxidants. An organo-phosphite acts synergistically with a
hindered phenol to check the thermal degradation of the polymers. These
compounds act as peroxide decomposers and can be incorporated in a 2 or 3 to 1
ratio (hindered phenol to organo-phosphite). Hindered phenol-based antioxidants
are usually used at a level of 0.2 – 0.8% of the binder. Higher levels will
cause yellowing. It should be noted that antioxidants do not reduce degradation
from UV light exposure.
Various classes of antioxidants have different thermal stabilization
mechanisms. The classic high-molecular-weight hindered-phenolic antioxidant is
effective as an oxygen-centered radical scavenger, but can suffer from
“pinking” in the presence of combustion gases like NOx, which can be found in
gas oven exhaust. The phosphite antioxidants act as decomposers of
hydroperoxides and provide protection during high temperature processing and/or
curing cycles. The new lactone antioxidants function as a carbon or oxygen
centered radical scavengers and inhibit auto-oxidation. The development of a
high-performance “phenol free” antioxidant blend exploits synergistic effects
between phosphite and lactone properties while illuminating the possibility of
pinking. There is a synergistic effect when using different antioxidants
blended together and the combination can meet heat and processing stability
requirements.
ANTI-RUST AGENTS
See Corrosion Inhibitors/Flash Rust
Inhibitors
Anti-rust agents are compounds that, when added to water, alleviate or
lessen rust formation. The term also refers to a variety of chemicals used to prevent corrosion on the
surface of iron or other ferrous metals resulting in the formation of products
consisting largely of hydrous ferric oxides. The same or different agents may
be used to prevent flash rusting, early rusting or to provide long-term
corrosion resistance. Anti-rust agents are important in preventing rusting in
cans or other metal containers of waterborne paints.
ANTI-SAG AGENTS
See Thickeners, Rheology Modifiers
This is a common term used to cover a class of compounds used to
increase the viscosity of paints, and control or prevent sagging of a coating
film during application and curing. Most of these materials impart a
thixotropic rheology to the paint.
Treated clays are the main type of thixotropic agent used in alkyd systems.
These are Bentonite clays that have been treated so that they build a gel
structure by hydrogen bonding in the paint. They are either added into the mill
base where the dispersion shear breaks the agglomerates, or added as a pre-gel.
These clays are of two types depending on whether or not they need a polar
activator. The activators are usually alcohols. The choice of a clay is
dependent on the system.
In many latex systems, structure is formulated into the coating and settling is
not as much of a problem as it can be in solvent systems. For some aqueous
systems the choice of colloid is very important. A variety of thickeners are
available for waterborne systems. Assistance should be sought from the supplier
of these various types of materials.
ANTI-SETTLING AGENT
An anti-settling agent is a suspension or rheological additive whose
function is to prevent or retard pigment settling, and to maintain uniform
consistency of the coating during storage and application.
ANTI-SILKING AGENT
See Anti-Flooding
Additive used to prevent a particular type of float that results in
parallel hairline striations of different colors running throughout the film of
a pigmented coating.
ANTI-SKID AGENTS
See Anti-Slip Agent
Slip-resistant or anti-skid additives are compounds that function
directly opposite of slip additives or lubricants. They make it more difficult
to move one surface past another surface. Compounds such as the colloidal
silicas are used for this purpose. In the marine coating segment, antislip or
antiskid coatings are those that reduce the sliding and slipping of humans and
cargo on decks. Silica sand is widely used as a point-of-application stir-in additive
in floor, deck and stairway coatings.
ANTI-SKINNING AGENTS
Anti-skinning agents prevent the formation of an insoluble film or skin
formation on the surface of a liquid coating during storage or during
application. Coatings that cure by an oxidative mechanism are most susceptible
to skinning. Replacing air with an inert atmosphere such as nitrogen in the
headspace of storage containers is an effective way to prevent skinning during
storage.
Skin formation may occur in a dipping tank that is open to the atmosphere. Here
the skin may begin forming as surface gel particles that are formed by
oxidation. As time passes, the gels coalesce into a continuous film as further
oxidation takes place. Additives such as the oximes, particularly 2-butanone
oxime, phenolics, solvents, and retention aids are used. Oximes such as
2-butanone ketoxime (methylethylketoxime or MEKO), that is the most widely used
compound, and cyclohexanone oxime are compounds that complex with polymerization
catalysts and prevent polymerization. Phenolics such as hydroquinone,
2,6-di-t-butyl-4-methoxyphenol (BHT), o-alkylphenol, and similar compounds act
as antioxidants that retard auto-oxidation reactions. These are used at low
levels of about 0.05% to as much as 0.2%. Solvents dissolve the components that
cause the skinning. Currently undisclosed composition products are on the
market from various suppliers. Retention aids prevent applied paint films from
drying too rapidly. Waterborne paints usually contain retention aids that slow
down the evaporation of water.
ANTI-SLIP AGENT
See Anti-Skid Agent
Any material added to a coating that will reduce or eliminate the hazard
of slipping on the surface of the dried film. Surface roughness or an increase
in coefficient of friction accomplishes this. A coating surface on floors,
curbs, streets, porches, decks and so forth may be slippery particularly if
damp and, therefore, there is often a need to add an anti-slip agent to the
coating to enhance the surface roughness. Polyolefins with high COFs
(coefficient of friction) are widely used in both commercial and consumer
formulas for floor finishes.
This is not to be confused with the slip or lubricity that many coatings are
designed to have particularly in manufacturing, packaging and transporting
coated goods.
ANTISTATIC AGENTS
Anti-stats are materials that, when added to the coating or applied to
the film, make it less conductive, or less attractive to dust, lint or other
airborne particulates.
Conventional antistatic agents used to increase the conductivity of polymeric
materials so as to permit dissipation of electrostatic charges can be separated
into four general categories.
1. Hydroscopic surfactants such as tertiary fatty amines and their quaternary
ammonium salts, monoacyl glycerides, monoalkyl and dialkyl phosphates, alkane
sulfonates and sulfonamides work by blooming to the surface and attracting a
conductive film of atmospheric moisture. These antistatic surfactants are
humidity-dependent and work on the chemical principal of limited polymer
solubility, blooming to the polymeric surface to provide sites for water
absorption from the atmosphere. Examples are: glycerol monostearate, stearyl
phosphate, dodecylbenzene and sulfonamide.
2. Conductive pigments, metal powders and other additives, which dissipate the
electronic charge proportionate to their loading in the polymer. Carbon black,
graphite fiber, metal powders, barium titanate powders, potassium titanate
whiskers, metal-doped silicas, TiO2 and fibers provide a
low-resistance pathway to dissipate the electrostatic charge and provide
permanent antistatic protection.
3. Metallocenes that provide a low-energy transfer of electrons between
adjacent aromatic layers. The primary example is bis(methyl)cyclopentadienyl
cobalt.
4. A new class of antistatic agents based on combined neoalkoxy titanates
and/or zirconates and subsequent tri-neoalkloxy zirconates that can be added in
minor amounts during compounding.
Antistatic agents are in hydrophobic coatings such as the silicones to improve
the coating’s resistance to dirt pick-up. These additives are usually cationic
in nature, but in certain instances they are nonionic hydrophilic
compounds.
Anti-static additives enhance the electrical conductivity of electrostatic
spray paints, improve gloss, reduce the Faraday effect in powder coatings, and
retard dust attraction on the finished product. (The Faraday cage effect is
observed in the powder coating of parts that have recesses, inside corners,
channels or protrusions on the surface of the substrate. The Faraday cage is
the area of the part where the external electric field created by the gun does
not penetrate.)
These static dissipative materials can be
blended internally with powder coatings to enhance the electrostatic spray
characteristics of the coating and minimize dust attraction. This increases the
transfer efficiency, which improves penetration into corners and recesses. The
anti-stats seem to have no adverse affect on the physical characteristics of
the final powder coating such as: impact resistance, pencil hardness, gloss,
gel time, color, adhesion, cure time, salt spray and condensing humidity. These
agents are able to control gassing and minimize pinholing in the
coating.
For powder coatings both charge
control and antistatic agents are used. Charge-control agents improve the
transfer efficiency and the ability of the powder to penetrate the Faraday cage
areas. The function of the antistat agents is to improve the ability of the
coating to conduct extraneous electrical charges to ground. These additives are
used to decrease the surface resistivity of the powder and the applied powder
coating.
Antistatic additives reduce the powder resistivity so that the powder
particles charge more efficiently. This in turn improves the overall efficiency
of the coating process. Several types of materials are used to reduce
resistivity. Quaternary ammonium salts (cationic) or alkyl sulfonates (anionic)
based on fatty acid derivatives are often used.
Some of the cationic antistatic agents are
catalysts for epoxy-containing powders and have a tendency to cause yellowing
when baking. Barium titanate is also used to promote powder-charging
characteristics.
ASSOCIATIVE THICKENERS
See Thickeners
Associative thickeners are polymeric compounds that provide consistent
and reliable control of coating rheology during manufacture and use. They
obtain their efficiency presumably by association between thickener molecules
or thickener and latex particles.
BACTERICIDES
See Biocides/Fungicides
Bactericides are additives that will kill bacteria (single-celled
aerobic or anaerobic organisms) that can cause a variety of problems in liquid
coatings and coating films. Examples of suitable compounds include:
hexahydro-1,3,5-tris (2-hydroxyethyl-s-triazine), sodium pyrithione,
isothiazolinone-based chemicals,
1-(3-chloroallyl)-3,5,7-tri-aza-1-azonia-adamantane chloride,
formaldehyde-releasing compounds, and biguanides (polyhexamethylene biguanide
[PHMB]).
BARRIER COATING ADDITIVE
See Seal Coating
BLOCK-RESISTANT ADDITIVE
See Anti-Blocking Agent
Chemical agent that prevents the undesirable sticking together or
adhesion of painted surfaces under normal or specified conditions of pressure,
temperature and humidity.
BODYING AGENT
See Thickeners
BRIGHTENERS (OPTICAL)
The brighteners are usually fluorescent dyes or pigments that absorb UV
radiation and re-emit it as violet-blue light that gives yellowish-white
coatings a brighter, whiter appearance. They are used to increase the luminance
factor and to remove the yellow undertone of white or off-white materials.
Small amounts of blue dyes are also used to achieve the same result.
BURNISH-RESISTANT ADDITIVE
Chemical agent that improves the resistance of a coating to increases in
gloss or sheen due to rubbing or polishing.
CATALYSTS
Catalysts are additives that will increase the rate of a chemical
reaction but are not consumed or changed in the reaction process. Catalysts
have widely varying compositions that depend on the nature of the reaction
being catalyzed.
Many of the crosslinking reactions used to form durable films are accelerated
by the use of catalysts. For example, melamine-crosslinked systems,
polyurethanes and epoxies make use of catalysts. Some systems use acids as
catalysts: phosphoric, carboxylic or sulfonic acids [such as para-toluene
sulfonic acid (PTSA) and dodecyl benzene sulfonic acid (DDBSA)] can be used.
Others make use of typical Lewis acid metal catalysts or Lewis tertiary amine
base catalysts.
Acid catalysts (and blocked acid catalysts) are used to accelerate the reaction
between the crosslinking resin and the primary resin. Good crosslinking is
desirable so that the final cured film will show improved properties. By increasing
the molecular weight of the crosslinked product, improvements are gained in
chemical, humidity and detergent resistance, corrosion resistance, film
flexibility and film hardness.
Typical acid catalysts used in coatings are: dinonylnaphthalene disulfonic acid
(DNNDSA), dinonylnaphthalene sulfonic acid (DNNSA), dodecylbenzene sulfonic
acid (DDBSA), para-toluene sulfonic acid (PTSA), and alkyl acid phosphate
(AAP). The relative catalyst strength is:
PTSA>DNNDSA>DDBSA>DNNSA>phosphates. In general, the sulfonic and
blocked sulfonic acids are strong acids, whereas the carboxylic and phosphates
are considered weak acids.
The formulator has to balance the properties of the catalyst with that of the
crosslinking agent, the cure temperature and time, the pH of the system, and
the desired final properties of the coating. This is not trivial and the
raw-material suppliers have guidelines that can be
followed.
A new class of blocked sulfonic acid catalysts, derived from aromatic sulfonic
acids, has been developed that promotes the crosslinking of hydroxyl-functional
polymers with amino-formaldehyde crosslinking agents such as hexamethoxymethyl
melamine, especially in coil coatings. These catalysts are particularly
effective in coil primer formulations containing calcium ion exchange
anti-corrosive pigments. In addition, the unique deblocking profile of these
catalysts provides the so-called snap cure at the desired peak metal
temperature and within the specified time.
In coil primers, this new class of blocked sulfonic acids provide outstanding
cure, viscosity stability upon oven aging, and corrosion/salt spray resistance.
In addition to resistance to basic pigment deactivation, these catalysts reduce
solvent popping defects and provide excellent adhesion/intercoat adhesion while
allowing extended storage of formulated coatings. Products from this class of
catalysts also are effective in topcoats where their cure response allows
release of volatiles before cure, thereby preventing popping, while providing
storage stability.
Dibutyltin dilaurate (DBTDL) and dibutyltin diacetate (DBTDA) are
well-established catalysts for the isocyanate-hydroxyl reaction in the
formation of urethane coatings. DBTDL is efficient but, as with any catalyst,
problems such as reactivity and hydrolysis of ester groups may occur.
Diazabicyclo[2.2.2]octane (DABCO) is a commonly used tertiary amine catalyst.
The tertiary amines are effective for use with aromatic
isocyanates.
There are, however, some unique non-tin catalysts based on bismuth, aluminum
and zirconium that are useful for these same reactions. The non-tin catalysts
are environmentally more acceptable and offer advantages such as: faster cure
rate, improved pot life, improved catalysis in cationic electrocoating and
reduced hydrolysis of polyester resins. Catalyst deactivation can occur because
of water, resins with high acid numbers, anions and pigments that are carrying
water into the formulation.
Oxidation Catalysts
Oxidation reactions are of great interest in fine chemistry, at both the
laboratory and industrial scale. There are numerous applications using the
conversion of primary alcohols into aldehydes.
Two types of reactions could fit in with
this scheme. First of all, there are stoichiometric reactions involving the use
of strong oxidizing agents such as: the complex chromium (VI) oxide/pyridine
(Collins or Sarret reagent); pyridinium chlorochromate (Corey reagent); oxalyl
chloride/DMSO (Swern reagent); dimethylsulphide/N-chlorosuccinimide (Corey-Kim
reagent); Dess-Martin periodinane; SO3/pyridine; KMnO4;
MnO2; RuO4, etc. Secondly, there are catalytic
dehydrogenation reactions with catalysts such as copper chromite, Raney nickel,
palladium acetate, etc. All these reactions do not fit in perfectly with the
responsible care approach, which is now a priority in all chemical reactions.
In effect, they present a number of drawbacks such as a high amount of metal
waste, poor selectivity, safety issues in some cases, or harsh
conditions.
A new family of green catalysts has appeared in the last few years.
TEMPO, or 2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-1-piperidinyloxy radical, is the most
representative member of this family, and its efficiency in oxidation reactions
is well documented. The oxidation of alcohols into aldehydes, ketones and
carboxylic acids uses a catalytic amount of the nitroxyl radical and a
stoichiometric amount of an oxidant such as sodium hypochlorite,
m-chloroperbenzoic acid, sodium bromite, sodium chlorite, trichloroisocyanuric
acid, bis(acetoxy)iodobenzene, n-chlorosuccinimide, or oxygen in combination
with CuCl or RuCl2(PPh3)3. The nitroxyl
radical is converted into an active species, which is the corresponding
oxoammonium ion, and is then able to oxidize various
substrates.
Among these substrates, alcohols are converted into aldehydes, ketones or
acids; diols into lactones; sulfides into sulfoxides; benzylic ethers into
esters; or α-hydroxy-lactame into anhydrides. Nevertheless, the TEMPO or
hydroxyl-TEMPO structures present several drawbacks such as poor thermal
stability, strong volatility with a tendency to sublimation, high solubility in
water with ensuing difficulties in treating the aqueous wastes, non-negligible
toxicity, and a complex synthesis route involving several reaction
steps.
A new green nitroxyl catalyst called Oxynitrox S100 is on the market and was
designed for oxidation reactions. High activities and selectivities are
achieved for different types of alcohols and its use can be extended to polyols
or carbohydrates. It is classified as a green catalyst as it does not contain
any metal. Additionally, it can efficiently replace classic metal catalysts
such as copper chromite, chromium derivatives, catalysts based on ruthenium,
molybdenum, silver, cerium, etc. It belongs to the family of nitroxyl radicals.
It features an oligomeric structure that contains several TEMPO
moieties.
Its high molecular weight (between 2000 and 3000 g/mol) makes it particularly
suitable for possible recycling without losing any oxidation efficiency. It is
generally used in homogeneous conditions, and the high molecular weight allows
easy recovery of the end products by simple distillation.
The conditions that are generally followed for the use of Oxynitrox S100
correspond to a biphasic medium. The general procedure uses sodium hypochlorite
as oxidant, Oxynitrox S100 as catalyst, dichloromethane, ethyl acetate or
toluene as solvent, and sodium bromide as co-oxidant. This co-catalyst leads to
the in situ formation of NaOBr, which is a more efficient oxidant than NaOCl.
The degree of oxidation of the final product can be controlled by the amount of
sodium hypochlorite: when using 1 to 1.3 NaOCl equivalents, or when using 2
NaOCl equivalents, the primary alcohol is respectively converted into the
corresponding aldehyde or acid.
Powder Coatings
Caution is advised when using a catalyst in a powder coating
formulation. The point in using the catalyst is to increase cure speed during
the bake. Excessive catalysis can cause a pre-reaction to occur in the
extruder, which in turn causes the formation of ‘gel bits’ or localized
crosslinking. These gel particles cause defects in the finished film.
Significant crosslinking in the extruder can also damage the
equipment.
Catalysts are used at low levels based on the binder – usually around 0.1 –
2.0%. Many of the polyester manufacturers offer resins that contain catalysts
and they provide information regarding the bake temperature. Catalysts are also
provided as masterbatches to improve distribution into the powder mixture.
Typical examples of catalysts for powder coatings are: Lewis base, ammonium
salts, dibutyl tin dilaurate, dibutyl tin oxide, stannous octoates, sulfonic
acid/amine, peroxides, methyl tolyl sulfonamide, dimethyl stearyl amine, onium,
and cyclic amidine. Again the catalyst is specific to the binder
type.
A non-yellowing catalyst for uretdione crosslinked powder coatings has been
developed that promotes the reaction of polyols and uretdione crosslinkers in
powder coatings. This catalyst, K-KAT XK-602 uretdione, is designed to improve
on the two most common issues associated with using uretdione technology – high
temperature curing and yellowing in the presence of common
catalysts.
Cure temperatures can be lowered by
30 ˚C, to 170 ˚C, at very low use levels and by even more to 150 ˚C at
higher catalyst levels. Physical properties of cured films in both clearcoats
and pigmented systems have shown excellent chemical resistance, high gloss and
good appearance. In addition, pigmented films have demonstrated little or no
yellowing compared to uncatalyzed films under standard and overbake
conditions.
By introducing an epoxy acid scavenger into the uretdione powder
coatings, cure temperatures can be lowered even further, to 140 ˚C, at
very low use levels. The acid scavenger prevents the carboxylic acid group on
the hydroxyl functional polyester from inhibiting the catalyst
activity.
The product is a white, free-flowing powder that can be easily incorporated
into uretdione-crosslinked powder coatings; it is also an effective catalyst
for use in caprolactam-blocked polyisocyanate powder coatings. The storage
stability of the powder is excellent, and gloss and appearance of cured films
is excellent. There are no adverse effects on corrosion, humidity and UV
resistance by using this catalyst.
CHARGE-CONTROL AGENTS
See Anti-Static Agents
CHELATING AGENTS
Chelating agents are compounds that are used to interact with metal
impurities and render them harmless in coatings. Their purpose is usually to
maintain or improve color by tying up the compounds that can lead to
discoloration. An example of such chelating agents is ethylenediaminetetraacetic
acid (EDTA). There are geographic areas where water quality makes the use of
chelating agents a necessity in order to successfully manufacture waterborne
paint by high-speed dispersion methods.
CLEANABILITY ADDITIVES
See Surface Modifier
Cleanability is the easy surface cleaning property of a coating.
Compounds that will improve this property include many of the silicone
additives that improve dust and other soiling materials removal. New
cleanability additives include hydroxyl-functional silicone-modified acrylates
that can crosslink through the hydroxyl functionality and remain located at the
surface. During film formation, the additives function as surface flow, wetting
and anticratering agents. After crosslinking, they provide permanent
cleanability, and improve slip and mar. They also can provide anti-graffiti
surfaces.
There are fluorocarbon compounds that will alter the surface energy of a film
to make it resistant to aqueous or nonaqueous soiling mediums in both liquid
and solid forms. This, of course, links the cleanability properties to the
efficacy of the soil repellant and stain-resistant additives.
COAGULANTS
Coagulants are additives that are useful for wastewater and water
clarification. Quite often coagulants are inorganic compounds that are used at
low levels of about 1-20 ppm to yield low turbidity influent and effluent
waters and wastewater. In the case of wastewater, up to about 100 ppm are used.
Some medium-molecular-weight, highly charged cationic polymers are used as
coagulants. These polymers have also been used to de-emulsify oily wastewater,
and to aid drainage and fiber retention in paper forming operations.
COALESCENTS (COALESCING AGENT)
Coalescing aids have a high boiling point which, when added to a
coating, contributes to film formation by way of temporary plasticization
(softening) of the vehicle. These aids facilitate the transition from liquid to
solid state during the latex drying or film formation process. Coalescing
agents have been traditionally used to obtain good film formation. Levels of
coalescent affect drying time and ultimate film properties. Important
properties of a coalescing agent include: hydrolytic stability, water solubility,
evaporation rate, freezing point, odor, color and safety and regulatory
concerns.
Architectural latex paints are made from a
variety of different polymers that are selected based on performance
requirements and cost. The monomers used in these polymers determine the glass
transition temperature (Tg), which characterizes the hardness of the final
polymer at a given temperature. The Tg and polymer type influence the amount
and type of solvent required to coalesce the polymer. Substrate, application,
dry time, compatibility, VOC regulations and efficiency all play a role in
determining the type of solvent or combination of solvents to be
used.
A conventional coalescent temporarily lowers the Tg, providing mobility
to the polymer chains. The softened polymer can then flow and fuse with other
polymer chains in the system, creating a protective, decorative film. To be
effective, the coalescent has to remain in the film after the water has
evaporated to ensure that a homogeneous film develops. A conventional
coalescent will evaporate out of the film after a period of time and the film
will regain its initial Tg and hardness. Various coalescents can be used
individually or in combination to help formulators optimize performance in
architectural coatings, while meeting VOC regulations.
Typical coalescing aids are compounds such as aromatic hydrocarbons, esters,
ester alcohols, glycols, glycol ethers and glycol ether esters. As would be
expected, the nature of the polymer – its solubility and affinity for various
compounds – will affect the particular coalescing agent
chosen.
EB (ethylene glycol butyl ether) seems to have been the preferred coalescent
agent in many industrial coatings for years. This is not by accident. While it is
a fast-evaporating solvent, it appears to also have more of a swelling effect
on emulsion particles that some of the other fast-evaporating aids. It is very
efficient in lowering the MFFT of emulsions.
Other typical examples of coalescing solvents are: ethylene glycol monobutyl
ether (butyl CELLOSOLVE™), propylene glycol n-butyl ether, diethylene glycol
monobutyl (butyl CARBITOL™), ethylene glycol monohexyl ether, dipropylene
glycol methyl ether, dipropylene glycol t-butyl ether, dipropylene glycol
n-butyl ether, ester alcohol or 2,2,4-trimethyl-1,3-pentanediol monoisobutyrate
[(TMB)Texanol™], 2-ethylhexyl benzoate. The various trade names can cause
confusion at times.
Butyl CARBITOL is a low-volatility coalescent and should be used to ensure
proper film formation when air drying or using long flash-off times.
Low-volatility coalescents are necessary when air drying in high-humidity
conditions.
Water-insoluble coalescents, such as hexyl Cellosolve, butyl Propasol™, etc.,
are hydrophobic solvents and can cause seeding if not premixed with water
miscible solvents.
Specific high-purity esters of fatty acids and their blends can also be used to
provide low-odor, VOC-free, renewable coalescents to enhance the performance of
latexes used in low-VOC paints.
New developments in polymer technology have introduced latex emulsions for
solvent-free architectural coatings. Architectural paints using this new
technology do not require the use of coalescing agents, plasticizers or cosolvents
to achieve good film-formation properties. Test results have shown that
formulated solvent-free paints maintain the properties of low-temperature
appearance, durability, film formation and open time normally expected from
quality conventional latex paints. Also, a significant advantage is the
low-odor characteristics of these paints, both during and after application.
Formulating approaches to solvent-free architectural coatings are now focused
on the selection of raw materials that would not contribute any solvents or
VOCs to the system. These ingredients include pigment dispersants and
surfactants, rheology modifiers, preservatives and substrate wetting
agents.
There has also been development of new
coalescing agents that are partially or completely free of VOCs. The efficacy
of these materials in all varieties of formulations with different polymers has
not been fully investigated.
Reduction of VOC using VOC-exempt solvents is not always simple, and
formulating with them can be a challenge. These solvents usually bring higher
cost and some have very low flash points, which leads to increased shipping
cost. Careful formulation evaluations need to be conducted.
COLLOID STABILIZERS
These additives stabilize the very finely divided particles that have a
size of about 0.01-1 micron (µm). Compounds such as animal glue, casein,
cellulose ethers, guar gum, gum Arabic, poly(vinyl alcohol) and similar
compounds are used as colloid stabilizers.
CORROSION INHIBITORS
See Anti-Rust
Corrosion inhibitors are compounds that improve a coating’s ability to
protect aluminum, brass, copper and steel. The term refers to a variety of
materials used to prevent the oxidation of metals, including surface
treatments, undercoats, and additives or elements alloyed to the surface of the
metal. Corrosion poses a major potential problem for metal surfaces that are
typically protected through the use of zinc-rich coatings, the use of
anti-corrosive pigments and the application of a barrier
coat.
Flash rust inhibitors are often used to prevent in-can corrosion during the
storage of waterborne coatings. Inhibitors also may prevent the corrosion of
ferrous metals during the drying time of waterborne coatings. Sodium nitrite
typically has been used in the past. Other types of materials include the
following: organic zinc complexes, salts of dodecylnaphthalenesulfonic acid,
ammonium benzoate, 2-aminomethoxypropanol and amine neutralized thiosuccinic
acid.
Long-term corrosion inhibitors have low water solubility and are often used in
combination with anti-corrosion pigments although they may be used alone. Some
examples of these materials include: metal salts of aminocarboxylates, salts of
dodecylnaththalenesulfonic acids, zinc salts of cyanuric acid, zirconium or
amine complexes of toluylpropionic acid, and tridecylamine salts of
thiosuccinic acid.
There are also organic, heavy-metal-free corrosion inhibitors to help industry
meet regulatory trends toward restricting the use of lead, zinc and chromate.
These corrosion inhibitors can improve wetting and adhesion over traditional
corrosion inhibitors, and can be used to formulate high-gloss coatings, as well
as corrosion-resistant clear coatings.
CORROSION-INHIBITIVE PIGMENT
A pigment that, when made into or added to a paint, has the property of
minimizing corrosion of the substrate to which the paint is applied.
COUPLING AGENT
Coupling agents are compounds that promote adhesion between dissimilar
compounds. These compounds are often used for the surface modification of
fillers, wherein they attach themselves to the filler by means of a hydrolysis
reaction and then leave a functional group available for reaction with the
coating, ink or adhesive. The main general classes of coupling agents are
comprised of the silanes and titanates.
Most of the organosilanes have one organic substituent and three hydrolyzable
substituents. For surface treatment applications, the alkoxy groups of the
trialkoxysilanes are hydrolyzed to form silanol-containing species. The final
result of reacting an organosilane with a substrate ranges from altering the
wetting or adhesion characteristics of the substrate, utilizing the substrate
to catalyze chemical transformations at the heterogeneous interface, ordering
the interfacial region, and modifying its partition characteristics. It
includes the ability to effect a covalent bond between organic and inorganic
materials.
Titanates, zirconates and aluminates are used as coupling agents. Titanates act
as organometallic chemical bridges between two dissimilar phases such as an
inorganic pigment and a polymer binder – or as an adhesion promoter for a
coating on a metal substrate. They provide an alternate to silane coupling
agents and couple to non-silane reactive substrates such as CaCO3,
carbon black and phthalo blue.
Titanates have six functions.
1. Coupling to form atomic monolayers on inorganics rendering them hydrophobic
and organophilic, thus allowing complete dispersion and deagglomeration of
pigments and extenders with minimum shear and work energy. They promote
adhesion, significantly lower system viscosity and shift the critical pigment
volume concentration (CPVC).
2. Catalysis to lower bake times and temperatures; to induce increased strain
strength to the polymer binder to increase mandrel flexibility and reverse
impact strength; to compatibilize dissimilar organics; and to synthesize polyesters.
3. Heteroatom to phosphatize and prevent corrosion or intumesce and add flame
retardance.
4. Alkyl/aryl functionality to create polarity for adhesion and
compatibilization.
5. Thermoset functionality to densify the degree of crosslink and
hardness.
6. Molecular structuring to create stable organometallics.
Designer waxes are also excellent coupling agents and since they are produced
by metallocene catalysis it is possible to tailor their properties to
individual applications. They are important additives in wood-plastic
composites (WPCs). WPCs are a new type of natural fiber composite with up to
90% wood fiber or wood flour content. The plastic matrix is usually
polypropylene or polyethylene, although polyvinylchloride is also used. Since
wood and plastic differ, especially in their polarity, suitable coupling agents
such as polyolefin grafted with maleic anhydride must be added. They
significantly improve the mechanical parameters of tensile stress and bending
load in WPCs. The polar functional groups of the coupling agent react with the
OH groups of the wood and form a genuine chemical bond. The non-polar areas of
the coupling agent have strong affinity to the non-polar polyolefin
chains.
Solvents that cause two immiscible liquids to homogeneously mix are also
referred to as coupling agents.
CRAZE-RESISTANCE ADDITIVE
A chemical that will prevent the formation of fine random cracks or
fissures on or under a surface of plaster, cement, mortar, concrete, ceramic
coating, or paint film caused by shrinkage.
CROSSLINKING AGENT
Crosslinking agents are compounds that convert a thermoplastic into a
thermoset. They are multifunctional chemical compounds that react with
functionality on the macromolecular chains and thereby form a thermoset or
three-dimensional polymeric material. The crosslinking agents are of di- or
higher functionality, and they become an integral part of the final thermoset
material except for materials lost in a condensation crosslinking process, for
example. These agents can range from low-molecular-weight to polymeric
materials. Examples of crosslinking agents are melamines, such as
hexamethoxymelamine, guanamines and other aminoplasts, isocyanates, epoxides,
amines, and so forth.
Epoxy-functional silane crosslinking agents
for waterborne coatings are also available that will crosslink under heat or at
room temperature on alkaline substrates if used in combination with recommended
catalysts. These are designed primarily for carboxyl- or amino-functional
acrylic latexes or polyurethane dispersions. The mechanism of crosslinking
involves the epoxysilane’s dual chemical functionality. The epoxy portion of
the molecule is reactive with the matrix resin and the alkoxysilane portion
crosslinks after hydrolysis by condensation forming siloxane bonds. The
alkoxysilane also can react with surfaces to improve wet adhesion of the
coating, or with fillers to improve pigment binding.
Crosslinking causes changes in physical and chemical properties. That
is, it causes changes in hardness, tensile strength, modulus, elongation,
solubility, swelling and other properties. For example, crosslinking renders a
soluble or thermoplastic polymer into a thermoset polymer that is
three-dimensional in nature and insoluble. However, the crosslinked polymer
system may be swellable to different degrees in liquids that may have been
solvents for the uncrosslinked polymer. The greater the degree of crosslinking
or the number of bonds formed between chains, the lower will be the degree of
swelling in any particular solvent.
UV-Powder Coatings
The latest development in powder coatings is the combination of powder
coating technology and UV technology. This technology is making strong inroads
especially for temperature-sensitive substrates. The most suitable approach for
a coating formulation is the use of a major binder and a crosslinker. The
crosslinker may control the network density for the coating, while the binder
determines properties of the coating such as discoloration, out door stability,
mechanical properties, etc. Furthermore this approach will lead to a more
homogenous concept in powder coatings applications as a category bringing
similitude to thermosetting coatings where crosslinkers such as TGIC and
β–hydroxyl amides are used. A crosslinker should present properties quite
specific for the application intended: molecular weight, high functionality,
and physical properties compatible to the application.
The existing UV-curing powder coating
systems generally build on two binders. There is an option to the existing
systems that consists of using unsaturated amorphous or amorphous-crystalline
polyesters comprising maleic/fumaric moieties as reactive double bonds in
combination with crystalline crosslinkers containing unsaturated reactive
groups.
PSG di-acrylate (CAS number: 85286-82-4) is rated as having high UV-DSC
reactivity in powder coatings formulations. Coatings using a crystalline
acrylic ester may be easily formulated using as a starting point any
unsaturated polyester of maleic/fumaric type. Addition of a small quantity of
PSG-diacrylate may improve the performance in commercial systems of lower
reactivity. This approach appears to be a reliable option in UV powder coating
formulations and makes possible the use of typical unsaturated polyesters as
binders in powder coatings.
CURING AGENT
See Hardener
Additive that promotes the curing of a film. Anything that promotes,
enhances or ensures mechanical or optical property development of a coating
(usually liquid) by means of chemical and/or physical change such as through
evaporation, polymerization or other means. The curing agent can be anything
such as thermal energy, radiation energy, a catalyst, various substances or
other means to enhance such property development. Some curing agents are termed
“hardeners.” Crosslinking agents are also curing agents.
Recent advances in new amine-functional curing agents have improved performance
of waterborne two-package epoxy coating systems. These new amine adducts offer
performance advancements along with the ability to meet near-zero VOC levels.
Those that are designed for cementitious applications in industrial and
do-it-yourself markets demonstrate water-reducible epoxy coatings with superior
handling, application properties, improved resistance to chemicals and staining
and visible end of pot life.
DEAERATORS
Deaerators prevent microfoam and pinhole formation in a coating. They
are very important in high-viscosity and high-solid systems, and absolutely
vital for airless applications. Silicones (polydimethyl siloxanes), mineral
oil, organic polymers (polyethers, polyacrylates), modified polysiloxanes (such
as polyether-modified polysiloxane with hydrophobic solids) and fluorinated
silicones are examples of materials that will function as
deaerators.
In waterborne systems, foam occurs as both macro- or microfoam and is
manifested as pinholes and air bubbles in the dried film. Macrofoam is readily
seen as large bubbles often held together in a honeycomb-like structural
formation. Microfoam is often recognized as fine spherical shaped
bubbles.
For solventborne systems, microfoam is often a problem and pinholes form from
small air bubbles, which create channels as they move through the drying film.
During the drying process the viscosity of the coating increases and the
channels remain open and fixed in the dried film. Pinholes severely reduce
protection properties of a coating, and they may allow salts and moisture to
penetrate the coating and deleteriously affect the
substrate.
Microfoam is caused by air entrapment during manufacture and/or application,
during the mixing of two-component systems, or from byproducts formed from
chemical reactions. Deaerators work by coalescing small bubbles into larger
bubbles that can rise to the surface considerably faster than microbubbles.
DEFLOCCULANT
See Dispersant or Dispersing
Agent
A material that prevents pigments in suspension from forming floccs.
DEFOAMER
See Deaerators for discussion on
microfoam.
Additive used to reduce or eliminate foam in a coating or coating
constituent. The terms ‘defoamer’ and ‘antifoaming’ agent are often used
interchangeably. In fact, they are not quite the same. A defoamer is a
surface-active agent that stops the foam and breaks the bubble once it has been
formed. It is a bubble breaker. An antifoaming agent prevents the formation of
foam so it never forms.
The term “foam-control agent” is a more appropriate term to use. In an aqueous
formulation, it is almost impossible (at acceptable use levels) to totally
eliminate all foam. The correct foam control agent will help to prevent foam
formation, but more importantly, it will allow the dried film to be free of
foam and any resultant film defects that might result from an air void in a
film.
Foam may be introduced at various stages of manufacture and use of the coating.
The raw materials used to make a coating, such as surfactants, dispersants,
etc., enable foam to form. Entrapped air, or foam, is introduced into the
manufacture of most paints as part of the process. Manufacturing care must be
taken to avoid entrapping air during production by choosing the correct
stirring equipment and stirring conditions. Letting the product stand for as
long as possible is also helpful in preventing air entrapment.
High levels of foam may occur during the milling stage, and defoamers are often
used as a component in a grinding paste. Due to the activity of some
surfactants at the air/water interface, foam is often created and stabilized in
both the pre-mixing and milling chambers of dispersing equipment. Foam slows
down the process of dispersion and adversely affects the moisture resistance of
the coating. Using silicone anti-foam agents may present an additional
potential for surface defects.
Foaming occurs during application to some degree, depending on the method of
application. For example, curtain coating carries entrapped air continuously
around in the system. Entrapped air also occurs with airless spray systems.
Spray application in relatively low humidity conditions or in high-temperature
conditions can increase the tendency for foam entrapment.
Latex paints are stabilized with surfactants
that easily generate foam under agitation. Elimination of this foam is
essential for the manufacturing process, for storage and for good application
properties. Foam reduction can also be somewhat controlled by optimizing the
settings on a spray gun and by adjusting the viscosity/solids level in the
formulation.
Foam is a dispersion of a relatively large volume of gas in a small
volume of liquid. Gases are soluble in liquid media to different extents and
are influenced by temperature. As the paint film starts to dry, the dissolved
gases try to escape in the form of bubbles. A bubble, as a sphere, requires the
least amount of surface energy. Large bubbles rise faster than small ones and
collect on the surface. They are often covered by a surface film of surfactant
or other additive in the coatings system. On the surface, the bubbles pack side
by side as densely as possible. In some systems, densely packed microfoam can
form on the surface and remain there even after the film has cured. This is
possible for high-build systems like some plastisols.
In the process of bubble escape, tiny pores may be formed in the film. In lower
solids films that dry quickly, the viscosity of the coating is increasing
quickly with drying. As this is happening, the smaller micro bubbles are still
rising to the surface but quite slowly; in the process these bubbles can form
small channels. If the rising bubble penetrates the surface, lack of flow
allows for the formation of pinholes – a surface defect. Sometimes these
microbubbles cannot penetrate the surface, but they will push a very thin,
viscous layer of coating to the front surface. This layer will remain on the
surface after drying or curing and becomes a spherical
blister.
Good defoamers not only need to be good bubble breakers, but they need to be
able to keep the action sustained and maintain good defoaming over time in both
oven and room temperature aging studies. Good defoamers need to be insoluble in
the foaming system. If the product is too soluble it will only increase
foaming. Defoamers need to have excellent dispersibility throughout the systems.
Spreadability is the ability of the product to spread evenly and uniformly on
the surface, coating the bubble particles and eliminating them. They work by
lowering the surface tension around the bubble and cause them to coalesce to
larger bubbles and eventually to break.
Most foam-control agents for aqueous systems consist of carrier, actives
(hydrophobic materials) and other additives that enhance spreading,
compatibility, product stability, etc.
Some examples of carriers include mineral oils, vegetable oils, glycols, glycol
ethers, alcohols, silicone oils and water. Three types of actives are most
common: hydrophobic silica, hydrophobic silicone and organic materials that are
hydrophobic/lipophilic. Many foam-control agents are blends of the above
actives. The other additives vary from surfactants, co-solvents, thickeners,
etc.
The actual foam-control agent that functions the best is based on its spreading
rate, compatibility, persistency and cost/performance. Many of the above
factors oppose each other in a formula. For example, the most compatible is
usually the least persistent; the least compatible often spreads the best;
etc.
Many defoamers are colloidal suspensions of particles that act as seeds to
allow bubbles to collect and burst. These types of additives can be simple
alcohols, oils or complex silicone oils on fine particle silicas. Defoamers
should spread instantaneously on the bubble surfaces and into the underlying
layers, and cause immediate rupture of the bubble.
Silicone defoamers are usually based on a polysiloxane-type structure. For
example, there are acrylate-functional polydimethylsiloxanes,
polyether-modified polydimethylsiloxane, etc. To select the proper antifoam,
the formulator needs to be aware of the nature of the foaming agent, the
foaming tendency, the solubility and concentration, pH, temperature and
viscosity of the system. Each of these factors has a direct influence on the
antifoaming agent of choice. Some examples of other compounds that function as
defoamers are waxes, fatty acids, aluminum stearate; amyl, capryl, decyl,
nonyl, and octyl alcohols; caster, corn, mineral, pine, silicone, and turkey
red oil; palmitic and stearic acid diethylene glycol monolaurate, sulfonic acid
salts, tributyl citrate, and tributyl phosphate.
Some foam-control agents have an effect on gloss; but not all do, so the
formulator must carefully evaluate this effect. Color acceptance of emulsion
paints is also important, and some defoamers can have a negative influence on
color development that needs to be evaluated.
Foam-control agents are very formula/system dependent and the best way of
selecting them is to test them. This is usually done quickly in the lab by
adding various defoamers to a known volume of paint sample, shaking for a set
time, and then measuring the height of the foam that is generated. The method
actually works quite well.
Foam-control agents should be used with some degree of caution to minimize
cratering. It is important for wood sealers and topcoats that the defoamers
used do not cause surface defects or create haziness in the final finish.
Incorrect use of antifoaming agents can cause craters, fisheyes, floating,
flooding, crawling, etc.
New, liquid, mineral-oil-free defoamers based on renewable raw materials have
been introduced into the market. These new defoamers are ideally suited for use
in the manufacture of synthetic latex, waterborne matte to satin finish
architectural coatings, plasters, and aqueous adhesives. They display
remarkable performance characteristics retaining defoaming capabilities even
after prolonged paint storage. Some of these new materials may be used as an
alternative to replace tributylphosphate (TBP).
There are no universal defoamers, although certain types function better with
certain emulsions, certain plant processing requirements, etc. Most suppliers
are willing to provide technical support to make the selection process easier.
DEGASSING AGENTS
Specific chemicals that allow for the release of volatiles in a molten
powder film. Volatiles can be interstitial air, blocking agents, and
low-molecular-weight polymeric fractions.
Benzoin is typically the choice for degassing powder coatings. In the absence
of benzoin, the air bubbles start to shrink very slowly as a result of a
diffusion-controlled process. Quite remarkably, in the presence of benzoin, the
bubble shrinkage process is accelerated to such an extent that most air bubbles
disappear before any significant increase in the viscosity occurs due to the
curing of the coating. This suggests that benzoin functions by accelerating the
rate of bubble shrinkage. Yellowing side effects of benzoin on powder coatings
may be associated with the formation of benzyl, the common oxidation product of
benzoin.
DENATURANT
An unpleasant or toxic substance that is deliberately added to make a
product unfit for human consumption.
DETACKIFICATION AGENTS
Paints used in automotive finishing operations are a tacky material and
tend to adhere to the surfaces of spray booths, particularly in the sump and
drain areas. To maintain the design intent of the paint spray booth the paint
overspray must be constantly removed from the sump to prevent clogging of the
sump drain and recirculating system. In order to assist in the removal of the
oversprayed paint from the air and to provide efficient operation of the
down-draft, water-washed paint spray booths utilize paint detackifying chemical
agents. The detackification products are commonly introduced into the water
that is recirculated in the paint spray booth system.
Paint spray booths are typically 100 – 300 feet in length and usually contain
many robotic and manual spray zones. The temperature and humidity are
rigorously controlled in these systems. As vehicles are painted in these
booths, a certain amount of paint does not contact the article being painted
and forms a fine mist of paint in the air space surrounding the article. This
paint must be removed from the air. To accomplish this, the contaminated air is
pulled through the paint spray booth by exhaust fans. A curtain of circulating
water is maintained across the path of the air in such a way that the air must
pass through the water curtain to reach the exhaust fans. As the air passes
through the water curtain, the paint mist is “scrubbed” from the air and
carried to a sump basin (sludge pit) usually located below the paint spray
booth. In this area, the paint particles are separated from the water so that
the water may be recycled and the paint particles disposed of as paint
sludge.
The paint detackifiers, or “denaturants” commonly added to these systems are
either melamine-formaldehyde-based or based upon acrylic acid chemistry. The
innovative nature of the chitosan detackifier (BC4200NP technology) lies in the
fact that it is derived from chitin, the waste product of food production,
namely shell fish harvesting. The solid chitin derived from these operations is
treated with sodium hydroxide at an elevated temperature to produce chitosan,
also called poly(glucosamine), that represents a deacetylated chitin. The
chitosan produced in this way yields a glucosamine polysaccharide structurally
similar to cellulose. The degree of deacetylation can be controlled by
temperature and reaction time. The chitosan produced, also in a solid state, is
not readily soluble in water, but can be rendered more water soluble by the
addition of various acids such as acetic, sulfuric, hydrochloric, citric,
sulfamic and mixtures thereof.
On a pound for pound basis, the BC4200NP
technology is either cost neutral or less expensive than the current paint
detackifiers in the market place. Further, field studies indicate that the
BC4200NP technology may reduce the overall cost of such programs by lowering
detackifier usage and by decreasing the use of ancillary chemicals, i.e.,
liquid caustic and biocides.
The melamine-formaldehyde
detackifiers that BC4200NP is replacing are derived from non-renewable natural
gas supplies and contain residual amounts of free formaldehyde as a necessary
consequence of the resin production operation. The acrylic acid-based
detackifiers are derived from non-renewable crude oil feed stocks and their
price is therefore subject to the global oil market. Further, since the
chitosan-based is less acidic than the traditional products, less sodium
hydroxide is necessary in an operating system to control pH resulting in less
overall chemical usage. Additional field studies have also indicated that less
detackifier is necessary to treat a given amount of paint and this also makes
the BC4200NP more attractive from an application cost
perspective.
The environmental advantages of this technology are summarized as
follows: no residual free formaldehyde: raw material is not derived from
natural gas and/or crude oil and therefore does not utilize non-renewable
resources; it is obtained from the waste products of food production (crab,
lobster and shrimp shells); low acidity level; chitosan, the main component,
has anti-microbial properties.
DESICCANTS
Desiccants are materials that have a high affinity for water absorption
and are used as drying agents. The most commonly used desiccants are silica gel
or calcium oxide.
DETERGENT
A detergent is a surfactant that is used to clean soiled surfaces. They
may be anionic, nonionic or cationic.
DILUENT
See Reactive Diluent
DISPERSANT/(DISPERSING AGENT)
See Surfactants
A dispersant is an additive that increases the
stability of a suspension of powders (pigments) in a liquid medium. The pigment
dispersing step is the most difficult and time/energy consuming part of the
paint manufacturing process. This is because of the difference in surface
tension between the liquids (polymers and solvents) and the solids (pigments
and extenders).
Pigments
and extenders are often received as agglomerates and then are subjected to a
grinding process that incorporates the pigment into the vehicle during paint
manufacture. During the grinding the agglomerates are dissociated into a
dispersion of particles. In the process, dispersants (surfactants) are used
that mainly prevent reassociation of the pigment and extender particles. The
dispersants are adsorbed onto the particles and hinder close approach of
particles by charge repulsion effects (ionic dispersants) or by steric effects
(nonionic dispersants). Wetting and dispersing agents are used to stabilize
pigment dispersions. They often use steric hindrance to avoid flocculation of
the pigment particles.
Since a dispersant is used to help the suspension of fine particles of a solid
in a liquid phase, it must be able to totally wet the solid particle and also
be able to interact with the dispersing medium. Dispersants act by being
absorbed on the surface of the pigment particles with the other end of the
molecule exposed and usually charged. Since like charges repel, the
individually coated pigment particles repel each other and stay uniformly
dispersed. Because the individual pigments are all so chemically different –
some are attracted to water and some are not – the dispersants have to be
chemically different. When changing pigmentation in a formula, the dispersant
needs to be checked quite carefully to see if it is stable in the formulation.
Good dispersion provides the end user with better hiding and color
stability.
Pigment dispersants are necessary to improve the wetting of the pigment and
enhance its suspension. The choice of dispersant depends on the nature of the
pigments and if the coating is a waterborne or solventborne system. Dispersants
are available for organic and inorganic pigment systems and for both solvent-
and waterborne systems. The proper choice of dispersant can be useful for
obtaining higher gloss, hiding power and lower viscosity.
Pigment dispersion is one of the most important, critical and complex steps in
paint manufacture. Usually pigments are dispersed in a mill base. A mill base
is a concentrated mixture of pigments, a small amount of the binder and solvent
and a wetting and dispersing additive.
In the wetting stage, the liquid in the mill displaces air from the pigment
surfaces. Shear force, applied by a mill, is necessary to break down pigment
agglomerates. As pigment particles become adequately dispersed, dispersants
that are now on the surface of the pigment particles prevent reagglomeration of
the pigment.
Because of their hydrophobic nature, organic pigments are difficult to disperse
in aqueous media. Surface-active compounds that are amphoteric in nature are
usually effective for both organic and inorganic pigments that are particularly
hydrophobic.
In aqueous systems, dispersants must disperse the pigment and form an
affiliation between the pigment and the dispersing medium that is water. There
are several types of dispersants commonly used in latex paints, for example,
phosphates (such as potassium tripolyphosphate) and several sodium phosphates.
The potassium salt is preferred because it is less soluble. Ionic types such as
the sodium salts of water-soluble polymers are also very
common.
There are ionic water-loving (hydrophilic) and oil-loving (lipophilic) types
available on the market. The hydrophobic part of the molecule is attracted to
the pigment particle, and surrounds the particle with an ionic layer. Pigment
separation by mutual repulsion takes place. These cannot be relied on for
in-can stability and need to be used then with nonionic
surfactants.
Ionic and anionic surfactants are also essential for good dispersion, and
contribute to the latex paint system by helping to optimize hiding power, flow,
and leveling. The amount of dispersant used is very small and is directly
related to the total surface area of the pigment used. Again, too much or too
little of these agents can affect in-can stability and other properties of the
paint.
Pigments are usually easier to disperse in solventborne resin systems; however,
higher solids systems will sometimes show pigment flocculation problems. This
can be the result of the lower-molecular-weight polymers or oligomers having
less of a buffering effect on the pigments and thereby permitting closer
pigment-to-pigment contact. Amphoteric dispersants have been developed that are
effective for preventing flocculation of carbon black and other organic and
inorganic pigments in higher-solids systems. These dispersants have also been
able to keep viscosity from increasing in some coatings where the polymer’s
solubility is causing rheology problems.
The most widely used wetting agents are primarily alcohol and alkyl phenol
ethoxylates used alone or blended with anionic surfactants. Some typical
dispersing agents for organic and inorganic pigments are salts of monosulfonic
acid such as: calcium or zinc sulfonate. Acetylenic diols are also sometimes
added. Another class of dispersing agents is known as the aromatic ethoxylates.
This type of molecule contains a relatively large anchor group that is a
polycyclic aromatic structure. No amine or acidic groups are present, so the
compound is pH neutral. Aromatic ethoxylates allow high pigment loading and do
not tend to foam. Water resistance and gloss retention are both
good.
Another widely used class of dispersants is based on soya lecithin. These have
been used for many years as pigment wetting agents, grinding aids and
dispersion stabilizers in oleoresinous formulas. This class of agent is also
available in water-soluble or water-dispersible forms. These are used in much
the same applications in latex formulations. The water-compatible versions are
also very useful in formulating universal colorants and as agents in both water
and solvent formulas to improve universal colorant compatibility and color
development.
Polymeric dispersants (hyperdispersants) are a new class of dispersants that
have significantly higher molecular weight than conventional dispersants. These
dispersants provide improved pigment stability and increase tinctorial
properties through their ability to wet and stabilize pigments. The result is
cost improvement through faster dispersion, which results in increased
throughput, lower pigment loading requirements due to enhanced color
strength, and good rheological properties as well as low foaming
characteristics. Performance is enhanced due to resulting high gloss, good flow
and leveling (surface properties), and improved transparency.
Polymeric dispersants contain polymeric chains for stearic stability in
solution and they must be able to be strongly absorbed onto the particle
surface. Many functional polymers and/or copolymers are capable of functioning
in this fashion. Examples are polyurethane or polyacrylate with tertiary amine
functionality, or polyester.
High-molecular-weight dispersants are linear or branched chain polyurethane or
polyacrylates that have molecular weights between 5,000 and 30,000 g/mol. These
dispersants have pendant anchoring groups, which adsorb onto the surface of the
organic pigment particle by hydrogen bonding, dipole-dipole interactions or Van
der Waals forces. The remainder of the polymeric dispersant is large enough to
cause steric stabilization. The level of dispersant is important because
performance depends on the optimum amount of saturation by the dispersant of
the pigment surface. Polyurethanes function well for viscosity depression in
the mill base, which can lead to higher pigment loading. The polyacrylates are
more compatible in nonpolar and highly polar systems.
Controlled polymerization techniques such as GTP (group transfer
polymerization) and controlled radical polymerization (CRP) techniques such as
ATRP (atom transfer radical polymerization), NMP (nitroxyl-mediated
polymerization), and RAFT (reversible addition-fragmentation chain transfer)
provide opportunities to customize polymers in a way that is not possible with
conventional random copolymerization methods. Each of these techniques has its
own characteristics that define to a certain extent the properties of the
resulting polymeric additives. These techniques are applied for the synthesis
of custom-made structured polymers. Compared to free radical polymerization
(FRP) they all allow much better control over polymer structure and molecular
weight distribution and they all have their specific
characteristics.
Due to the fact that the chain growth mechanisms are different in GTP and CRP,
it is clear that the resulting polymers will have different properties and
these differences also can show up in their performance as wetting and
dispersing additives. Controlled polymerization techniques are not only a tool
to synthesize block copolymers, they also make other polymer architectures
accessible. Gradient copolymers are one of the polymer architectures that
possess a continuous transition of the properties of the respective monomers
along the whole polymer chain; these polymers have very unique properties for
pigment wetting and stabilization.
In random copolymers the pigment anchoring areas and binder-compatible areas
are randomly distributed and generally too small for a strong stabilization
effect. In block copolymers (as well as in graft copolymers) the two different
areas are large enough for good stabilization of the particles in a pigment
dispersion. But the strict separation of the properties in the polymeric
structure can cause other drawbacks. Such polymeric structures may have a
strong tendency toward foam stabilization. Micelle formation, mainly due to the
incompatibility of the anchoring groups with the liquid medium, is also
observed and pigment wetting with the additive can become
difficult.
The gradient copolymer performs better because there is a gradually increasing
concentration of anchor groups along the polymer chain. This obviously helps to
increase compatibility, reduces micelle formation but still allows excellent
steric stabilization of the pigment particles. These structural differences
have a strong impact on the performance of the polymeric additives as wetting
and dispersing additives.
Polymeric wetting and dispersing additives are useful for all types of
pigments, whereas low-molecular-weight structures with only one or few anchor
groups are mainly used for inorganic pigments.
Silicone and silane pigment-treatment additives can cause pigments to disperse
evenly throughout coatings formulations. The materials can also help reduce
pigment floating from application through cure, producing consistent color.
They are effective in low concentrations, minimizing recoatability
concerns.
In an ink formulation the pigment must be dispersed and stabilized to achieve
good color strength, gloss, transparency and transfer efficiency. Stable,
concentrated dispersions with small particles and narrow particle size
distribution potentially can lead to higher gloss and color strength per unit
mass of pigment. The push towards waterborne formulations and increasing
pigment loading underlines the need for good dispersion and stabilization
properties.
The use of polyether amines (PEAs) as dispersants for carbon black has been
investigated. PEAs contain primary amino groups attached to the terminus of a
polyether backbone. The polyether backbone is based either on propylene oxide
(PO), ethylene oxide (EO), or mixed EO/PO. Adsorption, contact angle, and color
density measurements indicate that a polyether amine having a high ethylene
oxide content and high molecular weight provides the best performance. Surface
tension and interfacial tension values decrease with decreasing ethylene oxide.
Molecular weight has little impact on surface tension and interfacial tension.
Low HLB dispersants (below 5) exhibit poor dispersion stability.
Pigment settling is not always prevented by using wetting and dispersing
additives, but there is a noted distinction between ‘hard’ and ‘soft’ settling.
Soft settling may result from weak flocculation of properly wetted pigments and
stirring can easily redisperse the pigment. Hard settling occurs due to
improper adsorption of dispersant. The result is reagglomeration of the pigment
that can only be corrected with high-shear mixing.
DRIERS
A drier is a compound that catalyzes or accelerates the drying (curing)
of oil, paint, printing ink or varnish, or the crosslinking of polymers or
drying oils. Driers are usually metallic – metal
carboxylates.
Driers are not the same as curing agents, which chemically react with
functional groups in the polymer. Driers are catalytic in nature and do not
chemically react with the polymeric material. Driers promote or accelerate the
drying, curing or hardening of oxidizable coatings vehicles. The most common
driers that have been used in paints are metallic salts of monocarboxylic
acids, usually C8-C10 branched acids, such as naphthenic
acid, and neodecanoic acid as an example. The choice of acid does not seem to
have an effect on the drying. The choice of acid primarily affects solubility,
stability and efficacy. The acid makes the metal soluble in the resin system.
Insoluble salts, such as acetates or chlorides, do not function as driers.
Drier levels are always expressed as percent metal on resin solids. Use levels
are generally in the ranges of 0.01-0.6%. The metal in all cases is the cation
and has the capability of more than one oxidation state.
The drying of oil-based paints occurs
through a process that is characterized by oxygen absorption, followed by the
formation of peroxide, and subsequent peroxide decomposition. The presence of
driers in the paint accelerates the oxygen absorption and the resultant drying
of the film.
Traditional alkyds absorb oxygen into their double bonds and break those
bonds to form free radicals that can undergo polymerization to give a dry film.
Driers accelerate this process, improving the rate of absorption and
utilization of the oxygen. Alkyds would dry to a soft film without driers over
several days. Driers provide tack-free times of a few hours and hard dry
overnight. A metal carboxylate drier catalyzes or promotes the crosslinking of
resin polymers or drying oils.
Driers are classified as:
1. Oxidation (catalytic, top driers or surface driers). Examples are: cobalt,
manganese, vanadium, cerium and iron.
2. Polymerization (crosslinking drier). Examples are: zirconium, lanthanum,
neodymium, aluminum, bismuth, strontium, and barium.
3. Auxiliary (promoters) driers or catalysts. These are typically: calcium,
potassium, lithium, and zinc. The first three increase the rate of top dry and
zinc usually inhibits the top dry.
The oxidative driers promote the absorption of oxygen by the film as well as
catalyzing the formation and decomposition of peroxides. These driers promote
the surface dry of a coating. The top driers catalyze the decomposition of the
peroxides formed by the reaction of the oxygen in the air with the resin or
drying oil. This leads to the formation of direct polymer-to-polymer crosslinks
(top drying) and also the formation of hydroxyl groups and carbonyl groups on
the resin polymer and the drying oil. The hydroxyl groups are then available
for through drying or crosslinking by the through driers, which form
oxygen-metal-oxygen bridges or crosslinks between polymers.
The proper balance of driers in an oxidation-curing system is essential to
stability, rate of cure and development of film properties.
Cobalt is the most active drier and a strong oxidizer. It top dries the film
very rapidly. Care must be taken because excess cobalt causes wrinkling and
color changes in light-colored paints. Excess cobalt has also caused gelation
in some varnishes.
Manganese is also an active drier and is a potent oxidizer as well. It promotes
polymerization to a greater degree than cobalt. It is often used alone in
certain baking finishes. In air-dry systems it is used along with auxiliary
driers. Manganese has a dark color, which can limit its
use.
Iron seems to promote rapid drying by polymerization and hence is used widely
in baking finishes where the dark color is permissible. For air-dry finishes,
it is useful in eliminating film tack of some paints.
Rare Earth driers perform better than zirconium under marginal conditions such
as high humidity or low temperatures.
Lithium improves the efficiency of other driers and is the preferred
esterification catalyst in alkyd manufacture.
Zinc is an auxiliary drier and, in conjunction with cobalt, produces a harder
film. It retards the surface drying in order to prevent wrinkling and allows
freer access to oxygen, thus permitting hardening through the entire film. Zinc
naphthenate is a good wetting agent and often improves
gloss.
Calcium is used as an auxiliary drier, usually in conjunction with zirconium.
It frequently performs better than any other auxiliary drier in baking
finishes. Calcium driers are often added to the grind portion of the paint as
auxiliary dispersants.
Zirconiums are used mostly with calcium as a replacement for lead. These show
improved gloss, color, and gloss and color retention compared to lead, but do
not perform as well as lead under adverse conditions such as low temperature
and high humidity.
Aluminum offers outstanding polymerization
and yellowing resistance without viscosity instability. Neodymium is a
replacement for calcium and zirconium in VOC-compliant resins. It is cost
effective and has proven performance. Neodymium and lanthanum are recommended
for low-temperature/high-humidity applications. Vanadium is excellent for heavy
film build (4+ mils) but has shown some discoloration in white
coatings.
Waterborne coatings present a different sort of problem when using
driers. The presence of surface-active agents, in addition to ammonia and
amines and various resins, make proper selection important – particularly so
that seeding does not occur. For waterborne systems some potential problems are
as follows: incompatibility between the resin and the drier; potential for seeding;
potential for resin discoloration. There are many good water-reducible driers
including the rare earths: lanthanum, cerium and neodymium. Vanadium octoate is
also available in a water-emulsifiable form.
Driers in high-solids systems also present the following possible problems:
resin viscosity build, resin yellowing and slow dry times.
The best sources for starting-point drier combinations are the resin
manufacturers who have already found combinations that develop desirable
properties.
The change from natural acids like naphthenic acids to synthetic acids like
octoates or neodecanoates provided more uniform products to the industry.
DRIER STABILIZERS
Compounds that prevent drier absorption or dissipation resulting in the
loss of catalytic power of driers.
DYES (FOR USE IN STAINS)
Dyes are soluble colorants, which do not scatter light, but which absorb
certain wavelengths and transmit others. Dyes are generally soluble in a solvent,
or they may exist in such a finely dispersed state that they do not scatter
light and behave as if they were in solution. The dividing line between dyes
and pigments may be indefinite and dependent on a particular total system.
ELECTROCONDUCTIVE ADDITIVES
Compounds that alter the conductivity or resistivity of a system.
Silicon carbide is used in the manufacture of coatings to formulate conductive
coatings. It is used in paints that conduct electrical charges away from large
motors. Sizes are F400, F800. Silicon carbide is also used for wear-resistant
coatings, such as for tanks, tubes, etc. It is usually mixed with an epoxy or
resin matrix. It is also put on cutting tools with a proprietary method of
application.
EMULSIFIER
See Surfactants
Emulsifiers fall into the category of surface-active materials, or
surfactants. In general they are used to produce stable mixtures of two
partially immiscible liquids. Emulsifiers allow us to make water-in-oil (W/O)
emulsions and oil-in-water (O/W) emulsions. They promote the ease of mixing or
dispersibility by lowering the surface tension of the liquid, much as a wetting
agent lowers the surface tension of the liquid for application to a solid
substrate.
ENZYME-BASED ADDITIVES
Enzyme-based additives can be mixed with coatings to create novel
biologically and chemically active coatings, including those that
self-decontaminate and detoxify organophosphorus compounds such as nerve gases
and pesticides. A new understanding of enzyme biochemical capabilities is
leading to the development of innovative, biocatalytic “smart
coatings”.
Many organophosphorus (OP) compounds are potent cholinesterase inhibitors,
accounting for their widespread use as insecticides and chemical warfare
agents. Common organophosphorus agents include the chemical warfare agents
tabun (GA), soman (GD), sarin (GB), cyclosarin, VX and its isomeric analog
Russian VX (R-VX). Historically, most approaches to chemical agent
decontamination are post-exposure, focusing on the treatment of surfaces after
exposure has occurred and been subsequently detected.
Novel enzyme additives are being commercialized that not only remain stable in
paint but, remarkably, remain active for extended periods of time. One
self-decontaminating coating additive, OPDTOXTM, is
biocatalytic in nature, and represents a paradigm shift for chemical agent
decontamination. OPDTOX can serve either as a stand-alone
decontamination method or as a complementary approach to existing
decontamination techniques and products. When incorporated into a coating, the
additive creates a reactive surface that will initiate the process of
decontamination immediately upon exposure to organophosphorus pesticides and
neurotoxins.
Applied in advance of exposure, painted surfaces containing OPDTOX
can continue to degrade organophosphorus compounds after repeated exposures and
remain active following washing. The scientific basis of the product lies in
the ability of bacterially derived enzymes to efficiently degrade
organophosphorus compounds. The results are novel coatings that
self-decontaminate following exposure to organophosphorus compounds, which
includes many important environmental and security targets such as the nerve
agents VX, GD, GB, thickened nerve agents, and pesticides such as malathion
[o,o-dimethyl-S-(1,2-dicarbethoxyethyl)dithiophosphate], parathion
[o,o-diethyl-o-(4-nitrophenyl) phosphorothioate] and coumaphos
[o-(3-chloro-4-methyl-2-oxo-2H-1-benzopyran-7-yl)o,o-diethyl
phosphorothioate].
The enzyme of choice for OP decontamination is organophosphorus hydrolase. Of
the six major groups of enzymes approximately 80% of industrial enzymes are
hydrolases. Hydrolases are enzymes that catalyze the hydrolytic cleavage of
C-O, C-N, and C-C bonds. A class of hydrolase known as organophosphorus
hydrolase (OPH) can also cleave the P-O, P-F, and P-S bonds of the
organophosphorus compounds.
Of the currently stockpiled nerve agents, VX is the most toxic, as well as the
most persistent in the environment after release. In addition to the initial
inhalation route of exposure common to such agents, persistent agents such as
VX and thickened soman pose threats through dermal absorption.
Enzymatic hydrolysis of OPs occurs when the compound is cleaved at the
phosphoryl center’s chemical bond resulting in predictable byproducts that are
acidic in nature but benign from a neurotoxicity perspective. By comparison,
chemical hydrolysis can be much less specific and in the case of VX may produce
byproducts that are extremely toxic. Although a number of enzymes have been
identified that are capable of detoxifying OP compounds, OPH has the broadest
substrate specificity. The substrate range of OPH includes numerous
insecticides (paraoxon, parathion, coumaphos) and the neurotoxic chemical
warfare agents and their analogs. Catalytic specificities for this family of
compounds have been shown to range from rates that are diffusion limited (i.e.,
paraoxon, P-O bond, kcat=104 sec-1) to rates
that are six to eight orders of magnitude lower (i.e., acephate, P-N bond). The
enzyme is composed of two identical monomers associated to form a remarkably
stable dimeric enzyme with a thermal Tm of approximately 75 ˚C and a
conformational stability approaching 40 kcal/mol. Thus, two of the
characteristics essential for the successful application of an enzyme as a
biocatalyst, stability and broad substrate specificity, are met in this enzyme
system.
As the methods available for enzyme improvement have developed over the past
twenty years, it has become increasingly possible to rationally redesign
enzymes in order to make them more effective catalysts. In the future, it can
be expected that it will be possible to build specific enzyme catalysts for the
transformation of a given target substrate. As both rational and random methods
of enzyme improvement evolve, enzymes are being developed to play an expanding
role in the coatings industry.
Enzymes offer substantial advantages over chemical catalysts in a traditional
industrial environment. They are biodegradable, work under mild conditions,
often can provide benign alternatives to existing processes, and are not
associated with the production of hazardous by-products or secondary waste. By
tailoring enzymes for specific purposes, one can develop additives and mixtures
of additives that have been bioengineered to exhibit increased activity and/or
specificity for one or more chemical warfare agents. While there are a large
number of potential military applications for self-decontaminating surfaces,
including vehicle interiors (aircraft, ground support, marine), barracks and
housing, this self-decontaminating technology has numerous non-military
commercial applications as well, including surfaces in hospital clean rooms,
community safe rooms, schools, government facilities, industrial sites, mobile
decontamination facilities, and public transportation
systems.
The development of cost effective, self-cleaning surfaces will mitigate contact
hazards for first responders, decrease the time needed for reclamation of
contaminated spaces, and minimize environmental impacts commonly experienced
with caustic solutions and foams.
ESSENTIAL OILS
Essential oils, consisting mainly of highly volatile terpenes, are
derived from crushed plant material – leaves, flowers, fruit, peels, seeds,
roots, bark or wood. The precious oils are extracted from these materials by
physical processes. A commonly used method is steam distillation, in which
steam entrains the volatile oils. The “agrumen” essential oils contained in the
peel of citrus fruit are extracted by cold pressing.
Unlike fatty oils, such as olive or sunflower oil, which consist mainly of
non-volatile fatty acid esters, essential oils evaporate quickly, usually
without leaving grease spots on paper or textiles. Their volatility is the
reason for their other name of “ethereal” oils, originally meaning “celestial”
or “transient.”
Only one percent of all known plant species produce essential oils. Many of
these plant fragrances attract pollinating insects and so help to propagate the
species. Others protect against pests. Some essential oils act as deterrents to
particular creatures. For example, moths steer clear of lavender
blossom.
Many individual substances isolated from ethereal oils have a deterrent effect.
For example, the methyl anthranilate found in orange blossom oil repels birds.
Mosquitoes and horseflies avoid the smell of eugenol and geraniol. Eugenol is
the main component of clove bud oil and cinnamon leaf oil. Geraniol is present
in high concentrations in palmarosa and citronella oil, and is one of the most
widely used fragrances of all. That’s why these two fragrances are used in
mosquito repellents. For several years, research institutes, particularly in
tropical regions, have been looking for ways of using ethereal oils to protect
against insects like mosquitoes or termites and certainly as a way of
alternatively controlling or embanking malaria and yellow
fever.
Some ethereal oils and their components have an effective antimicrobial action
and some can inhibit the reproduction of bacteria and molds. Though natural
products, they ultimately derive their effect from chemicals they contain, such
as phenols and aldehydes.
Several scientific studies have shown that the oil derived from red thyme is
highly effective against both bacteria and molds. The oil mainly derives its
action from thymol, its main constituent. Thymol is around 30 times as
effective as the disinfectant phenol that was formerly commonly used in
hospitals (also known as carbolic acid or hydroxybenzene). The strong
antifungal effect of clove bud oil or cinnamon leaf oil has been clearly
demonstrated in a number of studies, while cinnamon bark oil is notable for its
strong antibacterial effect. But, even with the strongest-acting oils, the
effect never lasts long – they evaporate too quickly. However, as compensation,
the oils and their components have another advantage: so far as is known,
microorganisms do not develop resistance to essential oils.
The fascination that ethereal oils hold for many people is the result of the
psychological effect of natural fragrances. Like all fragrances, ethereal oils
can affect people’s moods and trigger emotions. The reason is the close link
between the olfactory sense and the limbic system. This part of the brain –
very old in evolutionary terms – controls emotions, affects and urges. The brain
remembers which odors have occurred in which situations. Encountering a
particular odor again rekindles the memory of the former
situation.
Ethereal oils could give plasters, paints and other coatings hitherto
inconceivable properties, which would be invoked simply by exposure to
moisture. However, there are two obstacles to using such oils in the
construction industry. First, many essential oils are very chemically
sensitive. Several of their ingredients are oxidized by exposure to air and
light; others are chemically changed by heat or the effects of acids or
alkalis. This renders oils ineffective; in extreme cases they are even
transformed into harmful substances. Some components would not even withstand
the shearing action of mixing them into the plaster-mortar paste or a liquid
wall paint. Essential oils are also very volatile and would evaporate from the
applied coating or surfacing within just a few days.
There is a way to protect the sensitive fragrances by molecular inclusion,
mainly in β-cyclodextrin. The ring-shaped molecules of this sugar can receive a
fragrance molecule in their cavities. In the cyclodextrin molecules, the
glucose building blocks are arranged so that they have a lipophilic cavity
(i.e., one with an affinity for fat) in their interior. This cavity can receive
another lipophilic molecule as “guest,” provided that it has the correct size
and shape. The cohesion between the two molecules is relatively weak (van der
Waals forces), so that the guest molecule can be liberated again under suitable
conditions. The weak van der Waals forces in such inclusion compounds leave the
two counterpart molecules unchanged.
This ability to enclose other substances
reversibly makes cyclodextrins invaluable in many products and industries, such
as household and personal care, pharmaceutical and cosmetic preparations,
textiles and foods.
Each cyclodextrin molecule acts like a small strongbox, securely
protecting a fragrance molecule against the chemical effect of its surroundings
and the key to opening the tiny strongbox is water. When water acts on the
inclusion compound, the fragrance is liberated in its original
form.
Thus, a cyclodextrin inclusion compound offers a convenient vehicle for
employing fragrances in construction applications – like flooring or plasters –
that are not exposed to direct rain. Here, atmospheric moisture determines how
much fragrance is released to the ambient air. The more humid the air, the more
is liberated. The sensitive fragrance does not evaporate away, and it cannot be
chemically changed. The protection and release mechanism is so effective that a
coating still liberates almost as much fragrance after several years’ use as it
did initially.
Several construction material manufacturers are currently testing binders
containing fragrance-complexes under various climatic conditions to exploit
their applications potential and gather early practical experience. A main
focus is on applications in public areas, such as subway and light rail
systems, airports, underground garages and public restrooms. The particular
fragrance released will depend on the application.
For use in public restrooms, the manufacturers choose a fragrance that most
effectively combats mildew growth on the walls. The wall covering or paint
would then emit the most active substance under just those conditions that
usually promote mold growth. A good candidate for such applications is the
β-cyclodextrin/thymol complex.
Construction material manufacturers, too, are very interested in the repellent
effect. In tropical Asia, tests are being carried out on paints that emit a
mosquito-repellent odor. Early results are highly
promising.
Another potential application lies in the
bird-deterrent effect of methyl anthranilate. A coating material containing
this fragrance in the form of a cyclodextrin inclusion compound could keep
pigeons away from walls and masonry ledges, protecting them against bird
droppings.
All the signs point to traditional construction binders soon having new
functions – all of them based on renewable plant extracts.
EXTENDERS
See Microspheres
Extenders (extender pigments) are materials that are added to coatings
and have many functions. We provide a definition of extenders here, although we
do not consider them as additives per se; typically extender use level in a
formulation is considerably greater than that of additives, which is normally
less than five percent. The main extenders are carbonates, oxides, silicates
and sulfates.
Current formulation practice more appropriately uses these minerals as
functional fillers. They are chosen to optimize coating stability, rheology and
application properties, and to enhance dry film properties. Very
fine-particle-size silicates, particularly certain kaolins and ultrafine talcs,
are used as pigment extenders in a more literal sense. The pigment that is
extended is TiO2. These extenders effectively separate the
individual TiO2 particles and provide the optimum pigment spacing
for maximum opacifying effect. Pigment extenders are used in this way to reduce
the amount of relatively expensive TiO2 required for a given level
of opacification and whiteness.
Extenders are available in a range of particle sizes and in a variety of shapes
including spheroid, needles, fibers and plates. Particle size, size
distribution and shape influence many of the physical properties of coatings.
They can have positive and negative effects on properties such as scrub
resistance, exterior exposure resistance, gloss and sheen.
Hollow Spheres and Opacity
Hollow Sphere synthetic Pigments (HSPs) are standard value-added
components in coatings formulations and have worldwide acceptance. A hollow
sphere is prepared through an emulsion polymerization process. In the wet
stage, the inner hole is filled with water. On drying, this encapsulated water
will diffuse through the polymeric outer shell, and then be replaced by air.
Because of the difference in refractive index of the shell (n~1.5) and that of
the air (n=1), light scattering becomes effective and the dry HSP appears like
a white, opaque powder.
The polymeric shell consists of a very hard
polymer, capable of withstanding the compressive forces that develop during the
drying process of a coating film. The HSP has no film forming capability, and
the same rules as for common pigments and extenders apply for the calculation
of the PVC.
In a coating, the main contributor to
opacity is TiO2, which, due to a high refractive index and optimized
particle size, has very efficient light scattering. Its efficiency, however, is
affected by the presence of large-particle-size extenders in the formulation
(crowding effect). It is also, on a dry volume basis, one of the most expensive
ingredients in the formulation.
The ‘pigment crowding’ effect normally takes place at high pigment
concentrations, but is also perceptible at lower levels when coarse extenders
are used in the formulation. When increasing the PVC either with extenders or
HSP, the pigment particles are forced to pack inside the voids between the
coarse extender particles. The inter-particle distance is no longer optimized,
thus their hiding efficiency is reduced.
The second contributor to opacity is air. Above CPVC, paint films become more
porous and their porosity increases, thus their opacity (dry hiding effect).
But, on the other hand, the higher the film porosity, the worse the resistance
properties. The hollow sphere synthetic pigment concept directly addresses the
above problems by:
1. Introducing encapsulated air voids into the paint film, contributes directly
to hiding without increasing the film porosity (no degradation of the
resistance properties). This effect is valid below and above
CPVC.
2. Optimizing the spacing between the TiO2 particles improves the
scattering efficiency of the titanium dioxide.
Applications for Opacifying
Polymers
In architectural coatings, opacifying polymers are well known and widely
used for their ability to scatter light and, at the same time, space titanium
dioxide without affecting the overall performance. In paper coatings, HSPs not
only bring opacity but also excellent gloss and improved printability. Current
technology permits the use of hollow sphere synthetic pigments in various
industrial applications like graphic arts or metal maintenance coatings and
traffic paints. In these areas the use of titanium dioxide is significant, and
reformulation with a synthetic opacifier not only brings cost savings but also
improved performance like better early block resistance in metal coatings,
better dirt pickup resistance and exterior durability in traffic paints, and a
better abrasion resistance and stability in opaque inks
application.
In other industrial segments due to severe application conditions (i.e., high
curing temperatures) the existing products have some limitations. Their shell
is not strong enough to resist high temperature and has a tendency to collapse,
which leads to a loss of efficiency.
FISHEYE PREVENTER
Additive that prevents the wet film defect manifested by the formation
of a pattern of small ‘dimples’ or ‘fish eyes.’
FLAME RETARDANTS
See Lubricants (Solid)
Chemicals or chemical preparations that will reduce flammability or
retard the spread of flame.
Combustion occurs when a substance is heated to its flammable temperature in
the presence of oxygen. As it is being heated it starts to decompose, and, as
it does so, it produces flames. Over the years we have become increasingly
conscious of safety, and as such, are concerned about the materials that are
used in the construction and finishing of buildings. This includes coatings.
The application of a flame-retardant coating can help to reduce the
combustibility of that coated surface.
Flame retardants are compounds that are decomposed by heat into nonflammable
fragments. These fragments have the ability of slowing flame spreading and may
even retard or suppress the combustion reaction. This is accomplished by
suppressing oxygen availability, the building up of protective layers of char
at the surface, inhibiting the combustion reaction within the flame area, or by
other mechanism.
Inorganic compounds that are used as flame retardants include aluminum
trihydroxide Al(OH)3, magnesium hydroxide Mg(OH)2 and
boric acid. Organic flame retardants tend to fall into two categories: (1)
phosphorus compounds such as phosphoric and phosphonic acid esters, such as
long-chain ammonium polyphosphate products; and (2) halogenated compounds such
as chlorinated paraffins, dibromoneopentyl glycol, tetrabromophthalic acid
anhydride, brominated diphenyl, chlorine and bromine containing polyols or
diphenyl oxide compounds together with antimony trioxide. Also chlorinated
paraffins have been added to latices to impart flame
retardancy.
Liquid chlorinated paraffins improve the flame resistance of coatings, are
cost-effective extenders of most resins and can be nonvolatile plasticizers.
They also improve adhesion, water and chemical resistance, and oil and gas
resistance. Dispersions and emulsions of resinous, and liquid chlorinated
paraffins are available and are useful in both cationic and anionic emulsion
systems because of their non-ionic bases. In addition to contributing to flame
retardancy, they improve adhesion, impart chemical and water resistance, and
allow the user to formulate aqueous rather than solvent systems. Applications
include rubber coatings, paper and fabric coatings.
Compounds that will cause char formation, particularly those with a large
number of carbon-carbon double bonds or those that swell (intumescent systems),
such as cellulose and sugar derivatives and melamines, are also used to enhance
flame retardation.
Zinc borate is used in many fire-retardant and intumescent coatings, usually in
combination with chlorowax or some other halogenated source. Other
fire-retardant additives, such as antimony oxide and/or alumina trihydrate, are
also used to provide synergism leading to a high degree of fire retardancy.
Zinc borate behaves as a fire retardant and smoke
suppressant.
Certain monomers – copolymers of vinyl chloride and vinylidene chloride – tend
to be less flammable than non-chlorinated polymers, but because chlorine is
less effective than bromine or phosphorus, additive flame retardants are still
needed.
Work has also been done in this area using dibromostyrene-based latices. These
are copolymers of dibromostyrene with various monomers, depending on the
desired Tg of the final coating. Dibromostyrene-based butadiene and acrylic
latices have the desired physical properties for use in coatings, adhesives and
sealants.
Fire-retardant coatings that are non-intumescent provide retardancy through the
presence of special additives. The most commonly used is antimony trioxide used
with halogenated materials such as chlorinated paraffins. Antimony trioxide
alone is not effective; mixed with a halogenated species it is very
effective.
Zinc borates and barium metaborates are also used to improve the performance of
antimony trioxide. When they melt, they form a glass-like material that seals
off the substrate from the flames.
Phosphates are also good retardant additives, and during a fire they will
release phosphoric acid that will break down cellulose into a char and lessen
the amount of material evolved and released. These have been used quite
effectively.
A new, low-load-level flame retardant, FlexB™, is a boron-based,
non-halogenated additive for nylon, epoxies and water-based coatings. Material
testing has achieved UL-94 V-0 ratings with loading levels as low as 3%. FlexB
is targeted at high-performance materials where traditional high load levels
negatively affect weight, strength and other physical parameters. FlexB shows
increased flame retardancy over the more traditional additives due to its
ability to bind into the backbone of the polymer, providing four levels of
protection: off-gassing, water production, charring and thermal
shielding.
Intumescent coatings are particularly interesting because when subjected to the
extreme heat of a flame these agents expand to nearly a hundred fold of their
initial volume. In the process they prevent the flow of
oxygen.
Intumescent coatings are fire-retardant coatings that protect the substrate by
puffing up when exposed to high temperatures and forming an insulating
protective layer over the substrate. Initially this type of coating, when
exposed to high temperatures, will char and expand greatly to retard the spread
of the flame by essentially forming a foamed barrier. The expanded coating is
often over 100 times the thickness of the original coating.
FLASH RUST INHIBITORS
See Corrosion
Inhibitors/Anti-Rust
Chemical compounds that prevent the phenomena of
the formation of rust immediately upon the application of a waterborne coating
to an oxidizable metal substrate. This occurs before the coating film has dried
and usually appears as small circular rust spots. Flash rust inhibitors are
typically water soluble or dispersible added to the coating to prevent rust
from occurring during the drying stage. To prevent flash rusting, proper
control of pH is very important. In addition to pH control, the use of flash
rust inhibitors such as sodium and/or ammonium nitrites, nitrates, phosphates
and benzoates, barium metaborate, etc., in small quantities (typically about
0.1%) will eliminate and prevent a problem from occurring. Amino materials such
as morpholine and AMP also may help.
FLATTING (MATTING) AGENTS
A wide variety of natural and synthetic materials that are added to
coatings to primarily affect gloss are called flatting agents. When light is
reflected from a smooth surface, the surface appears to be glossy. When light
is scattered as it hits the surface, instead of being reflected, a matte
appearance will be created.
Gloss is one of the key properties of a coating. The observed gloss of a film
is dependent upon the angle and intensity of incident and reflected light from
a surface. It is a function of the smoothness of the coating’s surface. A very
smooth surface will reflect most of the light rays, so that the angle of
incidence is the same as the angle of reflectance. As a surface becomes less
smooth, incident light rays are reflected at various angles, and the surface is
perceived as being less shiny and of lower gloss. In order for light to be
reflected in many directions instead of at the same angle, it is necessary to
introduce some degree of micro-roughness to the surface of the film. The
reduction in gloss to give satin, semi-gloss, flat or matte finishes can be
controlled by adding pigments and extenders – or materials called flatting
agents.
Any tiny irregularities in a coating film will cause light to scatter. Flatting
agents reduce gloss by imparting micro-roughness to the paint surface as it
dries and cures. The rough surface diffuses light rather than reflecting it.
The result to the eye is a matte surface. These agents include particles with
dimensions that range from 1 to 50 microns in diameter. Thermoplastic flatting
agents are being increasingly used for this application, and interestingly, the
smaller particles reduce gloss to a greater extent than do the larger
particles.
Gloss is also affected by conditions under which a film forms, such as the
coating application method, drying temperature, humidity, rate of solvent
evaporation and solvent composition. These factors can cause an increase or
decrease in gloss, depending on the particular coating formulation. Factors
such as high temperature or slow solvent evaporation rate, which allow the
polymeric resin to relax and find the most thermodynamically favorable
position, tend to give the smoothest surfaces and highest gloss. The method of
applying a coating (spray, brush and roller) has an influence on the gloss as
well.
The components in a formulation can also
affect gloss. As film formation proceeds, volatile or nonvolatile leveling aids
are sometimes required to assist relaxation of the polymeric film former to
minimize the surface area of the coating and give a smoother surface. Other
materials such as slip and anti-blocking aids can be used; these are meant to
migrate to the surface of the film to perform their intended function. These
materials change the characteristics of the surface and hence the
gloss.
Flatting agents are available in different chemical compositions and particle
sizes. Common inorganic materials include silicas for clear coatings, and
extender pigments, such as clays, talcs and carbonates, for pigmented systems.
Hydrophilic materials, which include some silicas, must be stored under
conditions that prevent moisture pick-up by hydration. The inadvertent addition
of moisture to solventborne systems can be detrimental, while the additional
water of hydration in waterborne systems might have to be compensated for, to retain
the desired solids level.
Silicas
Silicas have typically been used as the
traditional flatting agents in the industry. Silicas with large particle size
generally improve flatting efficiency; surface smoothness and clarity of the
film will decline. Small silicas improve surface smoothness but are therefore
less efficient at flatting.
The
performance of silica flatting agents is also influenced by surface treatments
such as organic wax treatment and inorganic surface treatment. Surface
treatment is used to prevent settling and also to improve mechanical properties
and often adhesion.
Silicas can be used in solvent and aqueous systems, and in virtually all types
of resin systems: acrylics, vinyls, polyesters, nitrocellulosics, urethanes and
alkyds. The reduction of gloss can have a significant corresponding effect on
increasing viscosity that makes the job of formulation sometimes difficult.
Silicas are available as: precipitated silica, fumed silica, diatomaceous silica
and silica gels.
The synthetic silica flatting agents are used to produce low-gloss finishes in
organic solventborne systems, waterborne and high-solids coatings. Typically,
waterborne finishes cannot withstand high shear that can destroy the emulsion
and cause foaming. So the flatting agent must be easy to wet out and
incorporate into the coating under low-shear conditions.
Precipitated
and Fumed
Precipitated and fumed silicas are not resistant to overgrinding. In some
cases, the overgrinding may occur under relatively low shear such as obtained
in mixing while tinting a batch of paint. Silica gels are resistant. Fumed
silica has a pronounced effect on thickening; silica gels do not. In fact,
their impact on viscosity is minimal.
Diatomaceous
Earth
Diatomaceous earth (silica, SiO2) has been used extensively
in the coatings arena as a very efficient flatting agent, achieving appearance
characteristics from a dead flat to a silky low luster in a range of coatings.
It imparts increased toughness and durability, added ‘tooth’ for adhesion, and
improved sanding properties. Because these microscopic particles are
irregularly shaped, they diffuse light and are used to impart degrees of
flatness to coating films.
Diatomite consists of the siliceous skeletal remains of single-cell aquatic
plants known as diatoms. The diatomite structure is porous with microscopic
voids that serve to control vapor permeability and for the reduction of
blistering and peeling and faster dry time. The use of this type of material
results in uniform gloss and sheen reduction.
Silica
Gels
Modern silica gel technology enables the production of highly pure,
porous products. A silica gel is an amorphous form of silica composed of nearly
100% silicon dioxide (SiO2) produced synthetically in a liquid
process. Silica gels belong to a class of synthetic silica materials known as
hydrated silicas, which have an average water content of 6% to 8% by weight.
Silica gels are produced from the acid treatment of an aqueous sodium silicate
solution.
Mixing sulphuric acid and sodium silicate under controlled conditions produces
the base gel from which all types of silica gels are made. This glass-like, solid
gel material is broken down into granules, then washed and dried to produce the
highly porous material needed for matting agents. Physical parameters such as
porosity, pore size and surface area can be manipulated to produce a range of
different silica gel types. The physical properties of silica gel differ from
other specialty silicas. The internal structure of silica gel is composed of a
large network of interconnected microscopic pores that attract and hold water,
hydrocarbons and other chemicals by the mechanism of physical adsorption and
capillary condensation. This huge pore volume and extensive surface area gives
the silica gel many of its unique properties.
The rigidity of the silica gel particle is higher than that for precipitated
silica and thus better resists the shear forces arising during the manufacture
and application of the paint. Silica gels can influence rheological properties,
although other agents are typically preferred for rheological control
purposes.
The efficiency of the matting agent depends on the type of silica, particle
size distribution and porosity of the particle. A high porosity is a key
feature of a modern matting agent as it enables the formulator to limit the
addition rate of a matting agent in a formulation. Unfavorable viscosity
effects as well as limitations in coating surface properties can be avoided. A
new milestone in micronized silica gel technology was reached by achieving a
pore volume of more than 2 ml/g for a micronized silica. Today, matting agents
for industrial applications are available in a variety of particle
sizes.
The application segments for silica gel matting agents include coil coatings,
industrial wood coatings, general industrial and automotive coatings as well as
printing inks, leather/textile coatings and decorative coatings. Coil, wood and
furniture coatings are the applications with the largest volumes, but
radiation-cured coatings and other coating systems as well as printing inks
also employ silica gels. The solventborne paint sector has been more important
for silica gel than waterborne coatings. However, the pressure to reduce VOC
emissions and formulate solvent-free paints has led to the development of
grades of silica gel, which are suitable for formulation in powder,
ultraviolet, and waterborne coatings.
Surface-treated silica gel flatting agents for high-performance OEM and DIY
wood coatings and other clear finishes are available. They contain an organic
additive that aids in dispersion and suspension, and imparts mar- and
burnishing-resistance to the finished surface.
Silica gels are more resistant to overgrind compared to precipitated silica or
fumed silica. This resistance provides gloss stability for demanding
applications such as coil coatings. Synthetic silica gels contain internal
voids – thereby giving pore volume or void volume. As pore volume increases,
the specific volume of the particles increases while maintaining a constant
weight. The result is more particles per unit weight, which yields higher
flatting efficiency. The increase in pore volume must be balanced against
application viscosity.
Selection and Applications
It is not easy to select the best flatting agent. It depends on the end
use of the coating, as well as dry film properties required: clarity,
smoothness, mar resistance and weatherability. Also the choice of flatting
agent can make a significant difference in application characteristics such as
viscosity, re-dispersion and gloss stability. Optimum flatting efficiency
results when a flatting agent is selected that has optimum pore volume – that
is, more particles per unit weight.
Particle size is also important, as it will affect flatting and surface clarity
and smoothness. In general, the larger the average size of the flatting agent,
the rougher the surface and the lower the ratio of sheen:gloss. For certain
markets this becomes very important and formulators need to determine which
agents to use depending on this consideration.
Average particle size can affect the flatting efficiency and loading level at
constant film thickness. Silicas are available in a variety of particle size
ranges. In general, the larger sizes generally give higher flatting efficiency
and are also less sensitive to variations in film thickness. Larger sizes also
give rougher surfaces.
In some cases, the flatting agents yield a smoother surface than the full gloss
coating does, which indicates that thin film coatings can retain the features
of the substrates. This can be important in paper coatings and wood sanding
sealers, where it is desirable to obtain a smoother surface by filling voids in
the substrate.
Silicas are used in architectural coatings
and varnishes, coil coating and general industrial finishes, industrial wood
finishes, topcoats and primers for corrosion resistance, and textured and suede
effect finishes. Some coatings segments need very high-quality synthetic
silicas – coil coatings in particular. Coil coatings are also very dependent on
gloss stability.
Clear coatings for fine furniture and other wood products are flatted to
obtain a satin finish. The satin finish is a desirable aesthetic feature,
obtained by lowering the 60˚ gloss while maintaining a relatively high 85˚
gloss, or sheen. Clarity is a very important criterion for wood finishes and
cannot be obtained with naturally occurring flatting agents, due to their high
index of refraction compared to the resin system in the coating. This
difference in refractive index creates internal haze. Therefore flatting agents
must be used that have a similar refractive index to the resin system for both
solvent- and waterborne systems. The silica gel technology enables these
flatting agents to be used in waterborne clear wood satin
finishes.
The clarity of the coating can be achieved by matching the refractive index of
silica and the resin system and controlling the particle size. Surface
treatments, or lack thereof, can influence this property
significantly.
Settling is a bigger problem in waterborne coatings than it is for conventional
solventborne systems. As such, wax-treated silicas may sometimes be used
because they provide better suspension properties. But great care has to be
taken during the dispersion because if the wax is separated from the silica, it
will tend to cause craters in the final film. For solventborne systems, silica
dispersion is always post additive. Hydrous silica has water-filled pores and
does not cause coagulation problems.
To incorporate porous silica into waterborne systems, the silica should be
pre-wet by dispersing in water, coalescents, cosolvents and thickeners prior to
addition to the polymer dispersion.
Other Agents
Organic
Particles
More recently, spherical organic particles are finding increased use as
flatting agents in coatings. These particles are smooth spheres and have a
much-reduced effect on viscosity than inorganic particles. These particles can
be reproducibly prepared to specific particle sizes. Some examples are: crosslinked
poly(methyl methacrylate), crosslinked poly(butyl methacrylate) and crosslinked
polystyrene. The different levels of crosslinking control the amount of
swelling the particles undergo in ‘good’ solvents for the
particles.
Thermoplastic particles do not form aggregates. Thus they are readily dispersed
and are not affected by typical shearing forces in preparing master batches,
although procedures that minimize high shearing conditions are recommended.
Organic thermoplastic crosslinked spherical particles offer a cost-effective
alternative to the more conventional inorganic flatting agents. The spherical
particles are readily dispersed, do not significantly affect viscosity of the
coatings formulation, and are available in specific particle sizes and
distributions. High-melt-point polypropylene waxes are also used to control
gloss in a variety of coatings. They may also contribute to a number of other
properties such as anti-mar, anti-block, abrasion resistance and metal marking
resistance.
Stearates
Metallic stearates improve suspension of solids, modifying viscosity and
imparting flatness. Fine particle size and limited solubility in solvents make
calcium stearate a highly suitable flatting agent for paints, varnishes and
lacquers. It is especially useful when low viscosity is desired. Because of its
low solubility in vehicles and solvent, thickening action is minor despite heat
encountered during the manufacture or application of
coatings.
Calcium stearate also aids in pigment suspension and viscosity control. It
produces a mild thickening effect and provides a good means of controlling
body, sag and flow characteristics. Its fine particle size permits mill
grinding with other pigments to obtain fine dispersions.
Zinc stearate is used in the production of lacquer sanding sealers. It imparts
the necessary sanding characteristics to nitrocellulose and
ethylcellulose-based films, seals the pores of wood and gives a flat, hard
finish. Zinc stearate is used for grinding of fluid pastes that can be
discharged from mills even where high temperatures are encountered, and for
lacquer films that have the maximum degree of flatting consistent with good
film hardness. Zinc stearate is used as a flatting agent and sanding aid. Its
low gelling characteristics give excellent flatting to paints since they can be
subjected to high temperatures that develop in some dispersion operations
without danger of excess viscosity increase.
Wax
Dispersions
Wax dispersions aid in imparting a matting effect to most aqueous
coatings, while enhancing properties such as abrasion resistance and water
repellency. Some of the new wax additives are characterized by large particle
size and are designed to highlight the positive properties of
large-particle-sized wax and minimize unnecessary interaction from dispersing
agents.
As a coating film dries, wax particles are transported to the film surface as a
result of the turbulence flow induced by water evaporation. Because of the
large particle size, protruding wax particles create a certain degree of
micro-roughness, induced as the film shrinks. As a result, the incident light
is scattered instead of being reflected, conveying the impression of low gloss
or a matte appearance. The degree of micro-roughness is determined by the
number of particles present at the surface and this depends on wax properties
such as: particle size and particle size distribution; particle density; and
amount of matting agent incorporated.
Unlike wax emulsions, where the particle size is much lower than 1 mm,
large particle size wax dispersions modify the optical properties of coatings.
They reduce gloss but also significantly impart other surface properties such
as enhanced scratch, mar and abrasion resistance; improved barrier properties
such as water repellency; enhanced slip and anti-blocking; and enhanced
soft-feel. In addition the new wax dispersions are totally solvent-free; do not
contain APE; have a reduced amount of surfactant; high solids content; and are
easily incorporated by single mixing. Typical application areas include wood
coatings, decorative and industrial coatings.
Low-Energy
Cure
For low-energy cure systems (such as UV or EB), flatting is more
difficult because it does not depend on solvent evaporation and film shrinkage.
As a general rule, slow-curing systems and slow response at the film surface
will lead to a situation where flatting is easier. For example, unsaturated
polyesters are slow to cure and are easy to flat.
Powder Coating
Flatting, or matting, concepts for powder coating generally involve
either (a) the addition of gloss reducers, which are not supposed to interact
with the curing mechanism such as extenders or waxes; (b) the addition of
matting agents that influence the curing mechanism in terms of acceleration or
inhomogeneous crosslinking (amine salts of carboxylic acids and multifunctional
cycloaliphatic carboxylic acids); or the dry-blending of formulated powder
coatings with different reactivities. New matting agents are being developed
that are free of waxes and amines, and therefore can provide non-yellowing
characteristics to many coatings.
Nano Particles
One of the more interesting applications of nano particles is in matte
coatings, a particular challenge in the 100% solids market. Most matting agents
substantially increase viscosity, a problem that is usually addressed by the
addition of either organic thinners or water. This solution however cannot be
used in a 100% solids formulation. Dispersed amorphous nano particles in a
variety of monomer components are available through proprietary production
methods. This methodology produces a family of additives for the formulation of
matte coatings with a nearly zero increase in viscosity.
FLOCCULANTS
Flocculants are chemical compounds that cause controlled flocculation in
a coatings system to give the formulator the ability to optimize color
development and adjust pigment mobility. As a paint film dries, flow currents
transport solvent to the surface. Smaller pigment particles may be transported
with the solvent and result in a higher concentration of smaller sized pigments
at the surface. This is called flooding and can be controlled through the use
of flocculating additives.
FLOW AND LEVELING AGENTS/FLOW MODIFIERS
Flow and leveling agents are chemical compounds
that increase a coating’s mobility after application, thus enabling the process
of leveling. They reduce the surface tension of the wet coating and, more
importantly, maintain a uniform surface tension over the entire surface area.
Flow is the resistance to movement by a liquid material. Leveling is a measure
of the ability of a coating to flow out after application so as to obliterate
any surface irregularities such as brush marks, orange peel, or
craters.
Surface
tension holds a liquid together and causes it to take the smallest possible
volume. A drop of liquid on a solid surface will cover a larger or smaller area
depending on both the surface tension of the liquid and the surface tension of
the substrate. For example, a drop of water, which has high surface tension,
will bead up as small as possible on a clean and waxed automobile. The same
drop of water will tend to completely spread out and ‘wet’ another portion of
the automobile that is not so clean or waxed. A liquid will ‘wet’ a substrate
when the substrate has an equal or higher surface tension than the liquid
itself. Sufficient wet film thickness is also important for a smooth surface.
The wetting of the substrate and leveling of the liquid film depend on the
surface tension of the coating. Both processes have opposing requirements in
terms of surface tension. If the surface tension is too high, poor wetting
occurs, along with the formation of possible defects such as craters. If the
surface tension is too low, poor leveling occurs and can cause orange
peel.
Because of the recent advances in technology within the industry in areas of
powder and waterborne systems, good flow is more important than ever. Some of
the resins that are being introduced exhibit poor wetting and flow
characteristics. This is such an important area because good flow is necessary
to eliminate possible surface defects such as craters, fish eyes, orange peel
and pinholes.
Many surface defects develop during the application of the coating. Application
methods can influence leveling. For instance, some brushes, rollers and direct
roller coaters can produce uneven surface films that require leveling for a
smooth finish. Other methods that produce a smooth surface – spraying, curtain
coating, reverse roller coating – need to maintain that smoothness during the
baking and curing process.
Leveling agents function by influencing the viscosity throughout the film.
Solvents with good solvating power and a gradual evaporation rate influence the
“open” time necessary for leveling. Leveling agents can also be pigment
dispersants that function by preventing the flocculation of pigments.
Flow modifiers can differ greatly in their chemical structure and in their
ability to affect surface tension and promote leveling within any given coating
system. As such, they need to be evaluated in a formula at several different
usage levels to determine the optimum level needed in any given formulation.
Even more importantly, a given flow agent’s effectiveness will vary from system
to system. The natures of the resin, other additives and application technique
will all affect the flow agent. For this reason, great care must be taken when
selection is made and laboratory work must be conducted to check on
effectiveness and surface defects.
Some flow modifiers are designed as ‘general purpose’, while some are very
specific. Some are more effective at controlling craters while others are
better at imparting good leveling. This is why proper selection is so
important.
Flow agents are available for powder systems, solvent and waterborne
applications. The most commonly used flow agents are: silicones, surfactants,
fluorinated alkyl esters, solvents and polyacrylates.
Silicones form an important group of flow control agents. These consist
of:
1. Polydimethylsiloxanes (silicone oils). - Increasing chain length gives
materials with higher viscosities. Higher molecular weight means reduced
solubility in coating systems and less compatibility. Lower-molecular-weight
siloxanes (dimethyl units <60 for example) are used for surface flow control
and to mask floating of pigments. Higher-molecular-weight polydimethylsiloxanes
are effective as defoamers. Those products with molecular weight greater than
1400 are incompatible and are responsible for causing craters. They can be used
to produce hammertone finishes.
2. Methylphenylsiloxanes.
3. Organically modified polysiloxanes. - Organo-modified siloxanes have
distinctly different properties than their original polydimethylsiloxane
counterparts, with respect to silicone crater formation, and other
silicone-caused surface defects. The compounds are derived from
low-molecular-weight polydimethylsiloxanes, and rather than having only methyl
functionality, various organic chains replace certain methyl groups to increase
the compound’s compatibility with coatings and inks. The organic portion of the
molecule can be polyether, polyester or a long alkyl chain.
The most important modification is the
polyether chemistry derived from ethylene oxide and/or propylene oxide.
Hydrophilic character, i.e., water compatibility, increases as a function of
the ethylene oxide content so that it is even possible to synthesize
water-soluble silicone-based additives. Factors influencing the properties of
modified siloxanes are silicone content, and the type and location of organic
groups on the molecule.
Polyether-modified siloxanes simultaneously influence the following effects in
coatings. Evaporation of solvent from an applied film causes differences in
temperature, surface tension, solvent concentration and density within the
film. Solvent-rich material rises in the center of these cells, while material
having a lower solvent concentration moves downward from the edges of the
cells. As a result, the surface tension in the center of the cell is lower than
at the edges. Material flow occurs from the lower surface tension to the higher
surface tension areas, forming valleys in the center of the cells and ridges at
the edges. Bénard cells can be particularly problematic in systems containing
mixed pigments. In clear coatings containing a matting agent, the larger
pigment particles are forced out of the zones of higher flow-rate to the center
of the cell. Bénard cell effects can be suppressed with modified siloxane-based
flow additives. The addition of modified siloxane compounds to a formulation
suppresses the surface tension of an uncured film to a uniformly low level,
which is altered during solvent evaporation. Therefore, no differences in
surface tension occur on the coating surface. Uniform drying and uniform flow
are achieved, due to the elimination of surface tension variations. Another
benefit, the requirement of good flow, is maintained because low surface
tension facilitates complete substrate wetting.
Silicones are multipurpose additives because, in addition to control of
flow, they also assist as slip agents, prevent floating, and in general, are
very effective at low levels. One of the most valuable characteristics of
silicone flow additives is the prevention of cratering together with the
reduction of sagging.
Silicones concentrate at the paint surface
and, because they are surface agents, in addition to reducing the surface
tension they influence the slip resistance of the coating surface. [For more information, see Slip
Agents]
The chemical structure of silicone additives (molecular weight and
functional groups on side chains) makes them more or less compatible with the
resin solution. Very incompatible silicones will cause surface defects
(craters). Compatible silicones will reduce surface tension and slip. Those
whose structures cause them to be somewhere between compatible and incompatible
will function as defoamers.
Fluorocarbons are the most highly surface-active group of coating additives.
Fluorosurfactants aid in wetting and flow because they decrease surface and
interfacial tension. Some low-energy substrates, such as polyethylene or metal
surfaces contaminated with oil, are very difficult to wet. Fluorochemical
agents function quite effectively and do not usually affect other properties
such as water sensitivity. Fluorosurfactants are leveling aids because they
minimize surface tension gradients between the resin and solvent that resists
leveling. They are generally used at very low levels (0.05-0.10%) and excesses
can cause severe foaming.
High-solids systems, powder-coating systems and lower-VOC coatings are
particularly in need of flow modifiers because the traditional wetting role of
the solvents has been greatly reduced or, in the case of powder coatings,
totally eliminated. The reduced solvent content of higher-solids coatings
causes an increase in surface tension that results in poor substrate wetting,
crawling, cratering and sometimes surface defects on the coating. Waterborne
coatings in particular are prone to flow defects, particularly when applied
over oily substrates or contaminated surfaces. The solventborne systems were
quite forgiving of minor amounts of oil or other contaminations. Waterborne
coatings are not at all forgiving over substrates such as metal, plastic, glass
and concrete. Raw-material suppliers are continuously introducing new products
to overcome these problems.
Powder Coatings
For powder coatings, the quality of the final film depends on the
film-forming process. This process includes the coalescence of individual
powder particles, the wetting of the substrate by the melted but not cured
powder coating and the flow of the irregular film into a uniform film. Both
viscosity (the resistance to wetting and leveling) and surface tension (the
driving force) play a role in the process of film
formation.
If the surface tension is too high, poor wetting occurs and craters may form.
If the surface tension is too low the leveling is also affected adversely and
orange peel may result. Polyacrylates and polysiloxanes are two types of
leveling additives in use.
Flow modifiers for powder coatings are designed to address the surface
imperfections, such as orange peel and craters.
Acrylic powder coatings can be contaminants for other nonacrylic powder
coatings. The result is usually some type of cratering formation.
Interestingly, acrylic flow agents are also used in powder coatings as leveling
aids. These materials are melt-mixed into the powder composition. It is their
controlled incompatibility that allows them to equalize the surface tension of
the air-to-solid interface. If the acrylic flow agent was dry-blended into the
powder coating, craters would surely be a result. The melt-mixing allows this
additive to do its job.
The majority of flow modifiers for powder coatings are alkyl acrylates. These
modifiers work by enhancing flow and leveling during the bake cycle. There are
surface irregularities that must be overcome during the application and cure of
powder coatings. In addition, the particle size and distribution can affect
flow. Just as in liquid coatings, incomplete leveling of the surface will
result in severe orange peeling. Orange peel for powder coatings is frequently
caused by either uneven application, or a nonuniform particle size distribution
of the powder particles. Sometimes nonuniform pigment distribution can also
cause orange peel. Polyesters, in particular, seem to be susceptible to this
defect.
Cratering and trapped air or other volatiles that result in pinholing are also
critical. For example, if a powder resin cures too rapidly, it can trap gas and
pinholes will result.
Some of the acrylic flow modifiers behave as a plasticizer and lower melt
viscosity, and increase the leveling time to produce a smooth surface. Acrylic
flow modifiers have been used effectively to provide high-quality surface
coatings prepared from a variety of vehicles: epoxy, melamine, urethane,
silicone rubber, acrylic, alkyd, phenolic, EVA copolymers, polyester and cellulosic.
Certain melamine-formaldehyde resin crosslinkers, such as methylated/butylated
coetherified melamine-formaldehyde resins, also provide good flow and leveling
and help to prevent pinholes, craters and picture framing in coatings. Levels
of use of flow modifiers are different than in liquid coatings, and systems
need to be well evaluated by the formulator.
For powder coating, polyacrylates (both homopolymers and copolymers) are the
most widely used flow-control agents. These are moderate- to high-viscosity
liquids and are usually supplied as a powdered master batch dispersed on silica
particles.
Additives based on polyacrylate technology, encapsulated by a solid (silica
free) shell, are available as dry powders for powder coatings. These additives
promote leveling while maintaining maximum gloss levels.
Silicones are also used and are typically more effective in reducing surface
tension. Polyether and polyester-modified polysiloxanes are preferred to
poly(dimethyl) siloxane because these are very active and are prone to cause
defects such as pinholing, craters, haze, etc. The modified polysiloxanes are
provided in a powdered form on silica particles.
The fluorocarbons are very effective in powder coatings but are not often used
because they are expensive. They are, however, very effective, particularly on
contaminated or oily metal substrates.
FLUIDIZING ADDITIVES
Fumed silica and aluminum oxide may be incorporated into powder to
improve fluidization and handling. These materials are small in particle size
and are low-bulk-density agglomerates. It is advised to incorporate these
materials during the pulverization stage of powder manufacturing. A level of
0.1 – 0.5% is usually sufficient, and higher levels can affect the
electrostatic behavior of the powder coating.
FLUORESCENT ADDITIVES
Fluorescent additives are compounds that emit light when activated by
ultraviolet radiation. Fluorescent whitening compounds add fluorescence to a
coating and as a result yellowing can be masked or a coating can be brightened.
They are also used as tracer or marking compounds that are visible under
ultraviolet radiation. The compounds function by absorbing radiation in the
ultraviolet region and then emitting radiation (light) in the blue region of
the visible spectrum. Care should be used when using fluorescent whitening
compounds in ultraviolet cure systems because their absorption in the
ultraviolet region may compete with the photoinitiator and reduce cure speed.
These compounds are usually used at low concentrations of about 0.05-0.5%.
FOAMING AGENTS
Foaming agents are materials that increase the stability of a suspension
of gas bubbles in a liquid medium, or they can also be blowing agents, which
generate inert gases causing a cellular or foam structure.
FOAM-CONTROL AGENTS
See Anti-Foam, Defoamer
An additive that is used to eliminate, prevent or control foam in a
system. In an aqueous formulation, it is almost impossible (at acceptable use
levels) to totally eliminate all foam. The correct foam-control agent will help
to prevent foam but, of most importance, will allow the dried film to be free
of foam and any resultant film defects that might result from an air void in a
film.
The causes of foam are many. Air can be incorporated into a coating by mixing
during the polymer/pigment grinding and letdown steps, by pumping during
package filling or by shear or spaying during application. Effective
foam-control agents are beneficial in preventing or reducing many common
coating problems such as:
- Viscosity increase and
loss of mechanical shearing power during milling, resulting in smaller batch
sizes and poor pigment/polymer dispersion.
- Volume increase during
the letdown and mixing steps, leading to overflowing.
- Slower package filling
rates due to inefficient pumping.
- Air incorporation
during transport and handling.
- Slower printing-press
speeds or lower pressures during spraying.
- Surface defects on
coated substrates, resulting in poor appearance, reduction in gloss or less
substrate protection.
Foam-control agents, or defoamers, must be insoluble in the foaming medium.
They function by being more surface active than the surfactant stabilizing the
foam so that they are able to enter the surface layers of the potentially
foaming liquid and displace it from the gas/liquid interface. The mixed
surfactant layers then prevent close association of molecules and exhibit low
elasticity. The presence of random, highly surface active, insoluble molecules
in the surface film interrupts foam stabilization via the Marangoni effect, and
thus foaming is prevented. The four basic processes by which antifoams disrupt
aqueous foam are: entering, bridging, dewetting and
rupture.
Surfactants orient at the air-liquid interface to create a higher surface
viscosity in the lamella than the bulk in which film drainage can be impeded.
The surfactant stabilizes foam by hydrogen bonding and electrostatic repulsion
between surfactant molecules within the lamella. Increased surface elasticity,
created by the thinning of the lamellae, also impedes liquid drainage and
subsequent foam collapse. Movement of the surfactant layer can actually pump
water back into the lamella causing further stabilization (Marangoni
effect).
Most foam-control agents for aqueous systems consist of:
- carrier
- actives (hydrophobic
materials)
- other additives that
enhance spreading,
- compatibility,
product stability, etc.
The terms ‘defoamer’ and ‘antifoaming’ agents are often used interchangeably.
In fact, they are not quite the same. A defoamer is a surface-active agent that
stops the foam and breaks the bubble once it has been formed. It is a bubble
breaker. An antifoaming agent prevents the formation of foam so it never forms.
The term ‘foam-control agent’ is a more appropriate term to use and they function
by a variety of mechanisms to prevent or rupture foam.
FREEZE-THAW STABILIZERS
Chemical compounds that impart freeze-thaw resistance to waterborne
coatings and prevent coatings from flocculating or coalescing irreversibly when
they are subjected to a freeze-thaw cycle. Compounds such as glycols and
oxygenated solvents are often used for this purpose. Thickening agents and nonionic
surfactant system stabilizers also function as free-thaw control agents.
Ethylene and propylene glycols are the most widely used. Propylene is preferred
because of regulations. In specific formulations, some of the glycol ethers
(carbitols) can also act as freeze-thaw stabilizers. These are used where
ethylene and propylene glycols have detrimental affects on rheology and/or
gloss.
Most freeze-thaw stabilizers are used in aqueous latex systems. To maintain
latex equilibrium, these additives are poor solvents for the latex particles
and are soluble or readily miscible in water. They function in two ways. First,
they lower the freezing point of the aqueous media. Second, they inhibit, or
retard, the desorption of water from within the latex particles, which
maintains intraparticle stability and allows future smooth interparticle
coalescence. Some of the additives used in a paint formulation for other
purposes, such as the thickener, nonionic surfactants, and similar compounds,
also play a positive role in freeze-thaw stabilization. However, they only
augment and do not do the entire job.
FUNGICIDE
See Biocide/Fungicide
Fungicides are additives that destroy, retard or prevent the growth of
fungi or spores. Fungicides are predominantly included in a formula to inhibit
the growth of fungi and algae on the dry film of both water- and solventborne
paint. Included in this family of compounds are substances such as: copper,
sodium or zinc pyrithione; carbamates such as 3-iodo-2-propynylbutyl carbamate;
tetrachloroisophthalonitriles; isothiazolones such as
2-n-octyl-4-isothiazolin-3-one; and 1-(3-chloroallyl)-3,
5,7-triaza-1-azonia-adamantane chloride. These are but a few examples of
fungicidal agents available for coatings.
FUNGISTAT
See Biocide/Fungicide
Compound that inhibits the growth of a fungus, or prevents the
germination of its spores.
GELLING AGENT
A compound that converts a coating from a liquid to a soft, elastic
solid with the nature and appearance of gelatin.
GLOSS IMPROVER
A material that increases the amount or degree of specular reflection of
a film.
GRAPHITE
See Lubricant (solid)
GRINDING AIDS
See Dispersant/Wetting Agent
Grinding aids are compounds, or dispersants, that stabilize deaggregated
or deagglomerated particles that have been separated into primary particles by
the energy supplied in a grinding operation.
HAMMER-FINISH ADDITIVES
A chemical agent that creates the appearance of a finish having been
applied over hammered metal.
HARDENERS
See Curing
Agent/Accelerators
The term ‘hardener’ is often applied to the amine or other catalyst used
to cure epoxides. Hardeners are single compounds or mixtures of compounds that
are added to a formulation to promote, enhance or control the curing reaction
and thus aid in property development. The compounds act by taking part in the
curing reaction and usually become a part of the final cured product. For
example, in the epoxy-amine curing reaction, the amine is the hardener that
causes the basic component or epoxide to react and form an epoxy
coating.
Blush and bloom are surface defects that need to be avoided in an epoxy
coating. They affect the coating performance as they can result in poor gloss
retention, discoloration over time (yellowing), poor overcoatability and
intercoat adhesion. The most important of these effects is the reduced
overcoatability, i.e., insufficient adhesion of a subsequent coating layer to
the system due to surface energy modification. In the case of the final layer
(top-coat) the mechanical and chemical properties are altered and the visual
appearance is worse.
The propensity for blushing or blooming to occur is related directly to the
structure of the amine. Low-molecular-weight (cyclo) aliphatic amines,
typically used in combination with epoxy resins, are mostly hygroscopic and have
a high vapor pressure. These types of products are very susceptible to blushing
or blooming. Aliphatic amines are mainly used as raw materials to prepare
“advanced” curing agents or in heat cure applications, but they are also used
in room-temperature applications where appearance is not so important. An
example of such an application would be grouting compounds (mortars) for
anchoring heavy machinery. In priming/sealing applications aliphatic amine
curing agents may also be used. Although the initial coating will be affected,
the application of a subsequent layer in due time might overcome the problem of
blushing.
In order to eliminate the formation of blush or bloom, a wide range of modified
amine curing agents has been developed. The two major categories are
epoxy-amine adduct hardeners and a special class of adduct hardeners called
Mannich-bases.
Epoxy-Amine Adducts
Amines and amine derivatives are the most diverse group of epoxy curing
agents. The epoxy-amine adduct curing agents are the largest category of
products designed to have a reduced tendency to blush. Epoxy-amine adducts are
reaction products of liquid epoxy resin with an excess of primary amine.
Although epoxy-amine adducts still contain a large excess of free amine, they
are less hygroscopic and have a lower vapor pressure compared to the neat
amines. Epoxy-amine adducts are less sensitive to blush formation and, as a
result, are better suited for coatings/floorings, which cure under high
humidity/low temperature. A disadvantage of epoxy-amine adducts is their
relatively high viscosity. In order to reduce the viscosity, epoxy-amine
adducts are often modified with solvents or plasticizers, such as benzyl
alcohol.
The fully polymerized epoxy resins exhibit a very wide range of thermal and
mechanical properties. Though other classes of compounds (e.g. anhydrides,
phenolic resins, and Lewis acids) are used as hardeners for some applications,
the breadth of performance imparted by amine hardeners is unmatched. The terms
hardener, curing agent and co-reactant are often used interchangeably to
describe compounds that polymerize or co-polymerize with epoxy resins to
produce usable materials. The polymerizing resin becomes harder than the
starting material, thus the name hardener. Because unreacted groups can lead to
property changes over time, a one-to-one ratio of epoxy groups to
amine-hydrogen groups is typically desirable, though not always necessary, in
epoxy formulations.
Though a variety of epoxy resin products are
commercially available, liquid resins based on the diglycidyl ether of
bisphenol A (also termed DGEBA or BADGE type resins) have the widest use and
availability due to their relatively low price, which is partially gained from
economies of scale. Because of this, the epoxy portion of epoxy formulations
often remains relatively fixed, and most variations in processing and
performance are obtained by making changes to the hardener side of the
formulation. The wide variety of commercially available amine compounds, and
decades of study and formulation has helped to make this group of hardeners the
most versatile and widely used of any epoxy reactants.
The choice of epoxy resin can be used advantageously to affect some
processing, thermal and mechanical properties, but the wide diversity of amine
curing agents typically allows the greatest latitude in creating formulations
to fit a wide variety of applications needs.
The three main use criteria for creating or choosing an amine hardener (or
blend) for an epoxy formulation are (in no particular order): cost, processing
requirements and performance requirement.
Use of amine compounds in epoxy resin curing is a primary way by which the use
of epoxy resins has greatly expanded in the decades since their
commercialization. Even greater versatility is being made available to the
epoxy formulator as new hardeners are developed to meet unusual processing and
performance requirements. Creative use of amine blends can provide a wide range
of processing, thermal and mechanical performance
combinations.
Mannich-Bases
Mannich-base curing agents are adduct-type hardeners formed by the
condensation of (aliphatic) amines, phenol (derivatives) and formaldehyde. The
phenolic hydroxyl group present in these types of molecules has an accelerating
effect on the epoxy-amine reaction rate. Moreover, Mannich-bases show better
compatibility with liquid epoxy resins than unmodified alkylene amines as well
as reduced blush/bloom tendency and improved early water spot
resistance.
Special grades of Mannich-bases are products using Cardanol, a major
constituent of cashew nut shell liquid, as the phenol component. These types of
products, often referred to as phenalkamines, are reference materials in
low-temperature, high-humidity cure applications.
HASE THICKENERS
See Thickeners
HASE thickeners are a group of polymeric materials whose chemical nature
has the form of a Hydrophobe-Modified Alkali-Swellable/Soluble Emulsion. These
compounds were among the early associative thickeners and rheology modifiers.
In a general sense, HASE thickeners are copolymers of ethyl acrylate,
methacrylic acid and a polymeric monomer. The polymeric monomer consists of
about 10-100 ethylene oxide units, and is terminated with an alkyl or alkylaryl
hydrophobe.
HEAT STABILIZERS
Heat stabilizers are often used with chlorinated polymers to eliminate
the abstraction of hydrogen chloride or at least prevent the acid from further
catalytic action. A wide variety of basic stabilizers can be used such as:
carbonates, amines, alkaline and alkaline earth oxides and hydroxides. Also
widely used in coatings are: epichlorohydrin, propylene oxide, epoxy resins,
epoxidized oils and plasticizers.
Alkyl and aryl tin esters are another class of heat stabilizers often used.
Examples are dibutyl tin dilaurate and dibutyl tin maleate.
HEUR THICKENERS
See Thickeners
HEUR thickeners are a group of polymeric materials that are in the form
of Hydrophobe-Modified Ethylene Oxide-Based Urethane copolymers. These
copolymers have hydrophobes coupled by urethane linkages to the ends or sides
of an oxyethylene polymer. To facilitate handling and addition to aqueous
systems, these thickeners are usually supplied as moderately viscous solutions
in an aqueous mixture that contains a solvent such as polypropylene glycol and
water. Coatings thickened with HEURs generally demonstrate excellent gloss,
flow and leveling, sprayability, and corrosion resistance. However, they also
generally exhibit poor sag and syneresis resistance.
HINDERED AMINE LIGHT STABILIZERS (HALS)
See UV Absorbers and Light
Stabilizers
Exterior durability of most organic coatings is highly dependent on the
use of light stabilizers. The two main stabilizer categories are ultraviolet
light absorbers (UVAs) and hindered amine light stabilizers
(HALS).
UV absorbers are not able to absorb all of the UV radiation that a coating is
exposed to. Some UV radiation will penetrate the coating surface. Because of
this, HALS are incorporated into the coating. These molecules work by
scavenging any free radicals that do form – this is different from UV
absorbers, which prevent their formation in the first place. HALS function by
removing radicals from the system and subsequently regenerating themselves.
Most formulators will use a combination of absorbers and HALS for this
reason.
Synergistic combinations of UV absorbers and HALS are optimal for the
stabilization of coatings. UV absorbers are governed by the Beer-Lambert Law,
thus absorbance is linearly related to the concentration of UVA, its molar
absorptivity (extinction coefficient), and path length (coating thickness). For
clearcoats, they provide the predominant mechanism for coating stabilization.
HALS are free radical scavengers and are not subject to Beer’s Law and work
anywhere in the coating system. They inhibit the coating binder’s photo-oxidative
reactions and help maintain their initial film properties such as flexibility
and water repellency. HALS are especially effective at coating surfaces,
providing better gloss retention, higher chalking resistance in pigmented
systems while avoiding crack formation in clearcoats. For pigmented systems,
HALS provide the primary mechanism of stabilization because most UV radiation
is blocked by pigment from penetrating beyond the first few microns of coating.
The selection of the appropriate UVA/HALS combinations and concentration is
dependent on the chemistry of the coating system, the presence of pigments and
fillers, film thickness and exposure conditions.
When selecting a HALS, the formulator must be very careful regarding the
basicity of the compound. A basic HALS is capable of interacting with acid
catalysts, metal catalysts and even some organic pigments. In an acid catalyzed
paint system, the use of a basic HALS will have the effect of retarding the
cure. For coatings systems like this, nonbasic hindered amines (such as a
hindered amino ether) can be used. A variety of HALS are available in both
liquid and solid form.
Certain pigments, such as carbon black and
titanium dioxide, absorb UV radiation and can increase the stability of the
coating. But TiO2 can also eject electrons and undergo a number of
reactions to form free radicals. Again this illustrates the wisdom of
incorporating HALS into a formulation desired to withstand weathering and
provide a quality coating.
HALS do not depend on the thickness of the sample for effectiveness. For
this reason they are useful for substrates that have a high surface-to-volume
ratio: thin coatings, multifilament and thin thermoplastic films. These
additives are outstanding in their effectiveness of protecting and prolonging
the coating in exterior exposures – particularly for polyolefins, polyurethanes
and acrylics.
HALS materials typically are based on the 2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine
chemical structure, with usage levels of approximately 1.0-3.0%. A typical HALS
is bis(1,2,2,6,6-pentamethyl-4-piperidinyl) sebacate. The total package (UVA +
HALs) level is 3.0-5.0% for powder coatings.
Under photo-oxidative conditions, HALS
compounds generate stable nitroxyl radicals that can serve as a trap for
carbon-centered radicals of the alkyl-type evolving from resin degradation.
These hydroxylamine ethers react further with (polymer)peroxyl radicals to form
relatively stable (polymer)peroxides, or a ketone and an alcohol, while
releasing the effective nitroxyl radical again so that one nitroxyl radical can
neutralize up to several hundred radicals. Stabilization with HALS is a
chemical process.
The optimal distribution of the HALS in the binder is crucial for its
effective use. When sunlight hits the coating, the radiation density is highest
right at the surface. Consequently, this is where the formation of protective
nitroxyl radicals for light stabilization is most needed. The deeper the
sunlight penetrates the coating, the weaker the radiation density, because it
is being absorbed by the binder, and, in some cases, by an additional UV
absorber. In the deeper layers the likelihood of light-induced decomposition
decreases continuously, and so the role of the sterically hindered amines in
these areas loses importance. The radical scavengers prevent the photolytic
decomposition of the binder, indirectly shielding the substrate below. The
coating lasts longer, and the substrate is also protected for a longer
time.
New HALS developments include functionalizing to prevent exudation out of
films, development of non-interacting materials that are suitable for use with
acidic pigments and acid-catalyzed coatings, and encapsulation to accommodate
formulating zero-VOC coatings.
HOMOGENIZER
This term is most often used to describe a piece of equipment, but may
also apply to an agent that aids in the formation or maintenance of a uniform
mixture of two or more dissimilar materials.
HUMECTANTS
Humectants are compounds that prevent the drying out of a formulated
waterborne coating in the storage container. They function by hydration of the
polymeric molecule and retaining water molecules that can be supplied to the
system. Examples are propylene glycol, polyethylene glycols, polyoxyethylene,
ethoxylated cellulosics, calcium chloride, diethylene glycol, glucose,
glycerin, hexylene glycol, sorbitol, sodium nitrate and
urea.
VOC regulations have prompted the development and introduction of a new variety
of liquid humectants that is VOC-free and also acts as a dispersing agent.
Effects on other paint properties have not yet been fully evaluated. Humectants
are sometimes used as a component of antistatic coatings for plastics.
HYDROPHILES
Hydrophiles are molecules, a group on a molecule, or a portion of a
molecule, or other moieties that have an affinity for aqueous substances and a
repulsion for oil-like substances. Certain hydrophiles can hold or bind water
equal to several times their weight.
HYDROPHOBIC AGENT
Substance that makes a paint film not absorb or exhibit affinity for
water. Hydrophobes are molecules, a group on a molecule, or a portion of a
molecule, or other moieties that have an affinity for oil-like substances and a
repulsion for aqueous substances.
HYGIENIC COATING ADDITIVES
See Enzymes
AgION™
A silver-bearing zeolite antimicrobial compound, known as AgION, has
been incorporated into polymer-based coatings to control the growth of harmful
bacteria, mold and mildew. These coatings may be applied to stainless or carbon steel products for
use in appliance, food processing and HVAC applications. The active ingredients
in the coating are the silver ions that are held within an alumino-silicate
zeolite carrier particle. The silver ions exchange with other ions (counter
ions) that may be present in nutrients or moisture and in this manner are
transported to areas that support microbial growth. The antimicrobial
properties of the silver ion have been recognized for a long
time.
Ca(OH)2
Ca(OH)2-based surface coatings, now available in a variety of
pigmented colors, act to prevent infections, in particular influenza, sinus
infections, pneumonia, allergic rhinitis, asthma and some indications are it is
beneficial for anthrax as well. This
is a revolutionary, one-application, antimicrobial-antibiotic surface coating
effective against all classes of microbes including bacteria, viruses, fungus
and algae. The coating combines calcium hydroxide as its active biocide with a
special Bi-Neutralizing Agent (BNA), a biopharmaceutical whose mode of action
keeps the coating continuously working year after year.
Calcium hydroxide inhibits the growth of common microorganisms on the coating’s
surface through its high alkalinity (at levels normally incompatible with the
life of microorganisms). Normally, hydrated lime is highly susceptible to
atmospheric attack – carbon dioxide in the air quickly converts calcium
hydroxide to calcium carbonate, reducing its alkalinity and rendering it
ineffective. However, with BNA, calcium hydroxide is safely stabilized by this
patented technology – a semi-permeable calcium hydroxide-encapsulated matrix
system. This specially engineered matrix system protects hydrated lime from
atmospheric degradation, preserving its antimicrobial-biocidal potency long
after the coating is applied.
What is unique is its benign nature to humans and its lethal nature to
microbes. The active ingredient is coming from a naturally occurring mineral
and has been used for centuries as a safe and effective way to kill
pathogens.
The end-use product is waterborne, fast drying, virtually odorless and
remarkably contains no VOCs. It offers a widespread solution to the problems
caused by the presence of the common microorganisms. Using an antimicrobial
agent registered by the US EPA this multi-patented technology works by creating
a surface coating that resists the growth of microbes on its surface for over
six years.
HYPERDISPERSANTS
See Dispersant
IMPACT-RESISTANCE IMPROVER
An agent that improves both the flexibility and adhesion of a coating to
a degree, which lessens the damage to the film upon direct or indirect impact.
These materials usually are rubber and polymeric in nature. They are partially
immiscible in the matrix that is being impact modified.
There are also new materials being introduced such as environmentally friendly,
actinic radiation-curable coatings for thermoplastic olefin objects, i.e.,
motor-vehicle bumpers that consist of a mixture of monomers, a free radical
photoinitiator, and up to 17% inorganic nano-filler. After curing, the
resulting coating provides excellent scratch resistant and high
impact-resistant thermoplastic olefin automotive parts.
IN-CAN PRESERVATIVES
In-can preservatives are additives that protect coatings during storage.
They prevent microbial attack that would result in gassing and attendant can
bloating as well as other spoilage caused by bacteria during manufacture or
storage. One additive that is particularly effective against such attack is
2-bromo-2-nitropropane-1,3-diol (Bronopol). It can be used alone or in
combination with compounds such as isothiazolinone or dibromodicyanobutane.
Such additives are effective against organisms such as Aspergillus
niger, Candida albicans, Staphylococcus aureus
and Pseudomonas aeruginosa.
There are two recently introduced new in-can preservatives. One is an aqueous
solution of sodium hydroxymethylglycinate based on glycine, a naturally
occurring amino acid. Another recent introduction, this time into the Chinese
market, is CANGUARD™ ULTRA BIT Paste, a broad-spectrum bactericide used for the
protection of industrial waterborne coatings against bacteria, fungi and
yeasts. The paste is a highly pure, solid form of BIT
(1,2-benzisothiazolin-3-one) that can be used to prepare additional grades of
solutions or aqueous suspensions of BIT. It is a long-lasting,
non-formaldehyde-based biocide that can be used under a broad range of pH and
temperature conditions. It can be used at higher temperatures and under very
alkaline conditions, where other preservatives are often ineffective. It is
useful for the preservation of polymer latexes and emulsion systems, waterborne
coatings, adhesives, oil-in-water emulsions, and for bacterial control in the
paper-making process.
INSECTICIDES
Chemical compounds that kill insects on contact.
In recent years, there have been some EPA-registered insecticide coating
additives.
- o,o-diethyl-o-(3,5,6-trichloro-2-pyridyl)
phosphorothioate (61.5%)
- o,o-diethyl-o-(2-isopropyl-6-methyl-4-pyrimidinyl)
phosphorothioate (87%)
- Disodium
octaboratetetrahydrate (Na2B8O13.4H2O)
Latex insecticidal coatings that contain chlorpyrifos, the active chemical
insecticide, are being used in various applications in certain climates.
Three-mil-thick coatings provide effective insecticide treatment for a two-year
period against roaches, black widow spiders and fire ants, which are fond of
attacking wiring and electrical connections.
There is no doubt that the aesthetic appearance of a coating is enhanced by the
reduction or elimination of unsightly cobwebs, nests and bugs. The log home
industry recognized this because of need, and many other types of structures
can also benefit from the technology, such as: farms, public buildings and
resorts.
It is thought that insecticide additives behave somewhat like pigment in a
coating film and are dispersed throughout the film. Because the insecticide is
dispersed throughout the dried film, as the film erodes with aging new
insecticide is exposed. The mucous membranes on the bottom of the feet of
insects allow them to walk on vertical surfaces with ease. As they crawl along
a treated material, they absorb the pesticide through the mucous membrane, and
it is then transferred to their central nervous system and they are overcome.
Both humans and other animals are able to metabolize these
insecticides.
Insecticide additives, while not used to a large extent, do have some
applications. The reduction of insects and cobwebs does a great deal to enhance
the appearance of buildings – especially in areas where they tend to be more
prolific because of the climate.
Also available today is an insecticidal coating composition for use on
cellulosic substrates such as packaging materials to provide protection against
insects. The insecticidal coating is comprised of a blend of a polyvinyl
acetate emulsion and a vinyl acetate ethylene copolymer emulsion, typical
additives, and an insecticide having an LD50 value of between about
14,500 to 15,500 mg/kg.
INTUMESCENT ADDITIVE
See Flame Retardants, Lubricants
(Solid)
Agent that generates inert gas upon heating, thereby causing formation
of a foam structure with insulative properties.
Intumescent coatings are fire-retardant paints that protect the substrate by
puffing up when exposed to high temperatures and forming an insulating
protective layer over the substrate. In the process they prevent the flow of
oxygen. Initially this type of coating, when exposed to high temperatures, will
char and expand greatly to retard the spread of the flame by essentially
forming a foamed barrier. The expanded coating is often over 100 times the
thickness of the original coating.
Intumescent coatings consist of various components whose effectiveness is
decisively influenced by the mixing ratios chosen. The critical components are
the acid source, the binder, the blowing agent, the carbonific compound and the
plasticizer. These substances greatly affect the properties of the coating such
as tropical- or water-resistance.
LEAFING AGENT
Agent that promotes the action of floating and slight overlapping of
metallic or other laminar flake pigments on the surface of a
coating.
Due to their manufacturing process, some metallic pigments are covered with a
hydrophobic layer of stearic acid, which has a significant influence on the
wetting properties and may drive the pigments – especially in waterborne
systems – towards the coating’s surface. This is called a leafing effect and
this ‘surface-oriented’ alignment gives excellent brilliance and chroma, but
the pigments are not always fully embedded into the coating’s film.
Consequently, they may have poor rub-resistance and are very sensitive to
corrosion. The use of surfactants or polar organic solvents provides better
wetting, hence pigments turn out to be ‘non-leafing’.
LEVELING PROMOTER
See Flow and Leveling Agent
LIGHT STABILIZERS
See Hindered Amine Light Stabilizers, UV
Absorbers
LUBRICANTS (SURFACE)
See Slip Aids
Lubricants are additives that decrease the frictional resistance between
surfaces. They make removal of individual sheets from a stack of metal sheets
easier when they are used in a production operation, facilitate transport of
coated objects, and so on. Lubricants include zinc stearates, castor and sperm
waxes, etc.
LUBRICANTS (SOLID)
Graphite
Graphite is one of three common naturally occurring forms of carbon
(graphite, amorphous carbon, and diamond). The word graphite is derived from
the Greek word graphein, to write. Common names for graphite include black
lead, plumbago and mineral carbon.
Graphite is effective, low cost and multi functional when used in coatings.
Graphite provides chemical inertness, refractoriness, electrical conductivity,
thermal conductivity, lubricity, UV stability, and, in the case of ‘expandable’
graphite, fire retardance. With proper rheological adjustment, graphite is
compatible with most aqueous and non-aqueous coating systems. Graphite is
available in ‘off-the-shelf’ purities from 80-99+% carbon, and sizes ranging
from large grains to 3 microns. Particle distributions can be tailored to meet
almost any liquid system requirement.
Graphite is a hexagonal mineral and crystallizes in the 6/m2/m2m crystal class.
Common forms (crystal faces) include the {0001} basal pinacoid, {1010} prism,
and {1011} pyramid. Graphite has perfect cleavage parallel to {0001} (perfect
basal cleavage). Depending upon the purity, the specific gravity is 2.20-2.30.
Graphite is gray to black in color, is opaque to visible light even in thin
section, and has a metallic luster. It is soft, having a Mohs hardness of 1-2,
and is flexible but not elastic. Graphite has high thermal and electrical
conductivity, is highly refractory, and is chemically inert
The Four Forms of Graphite
Four main types or varieties of graphite exist. Each of these types is
used commercially as additives in coating systems; flake, crystalline-vein,
amorphous graphite and synthetic. Each type of graphite has attributes, which
determine its effectiveness in a given coating application.
1. Flake Graphite
Flake graphite, as indicated by the name, has a flaky morphology. Due to
its impervious laminar structure, flake graphite is an effective coating
additive. When properly dispersed, overlapping graphite lamella form a tough,
impervious coating that is lubricious, inert, and both electrically and
thermally conductive. Also, flake graphite is non-photo reactive so it will not
be bleached or affected by ultraviolet radiation.
Flake graphite is available in sizes ranging from 0.5 mm flakes to 3-micron
powder. The morphology of flake graphite is consistently laminar regardless of
particle size. By adjusting the rheology of the system, flake graphite of
various sizes can be used effectively in coatings. Intumescent Flake
Graphite
Also known as “expandable graphite,” intumescent flake graphite is a
synthesized intercalation compound of graphite that expands or exfoliates when
heated. When added to coatings, intumescent graphite can act in various ways as
a fire suppressant. Suppression may be affected by the following
mechanisms.
- Formation of a char
layer. Expanded graphite will form a “char” layer between the flame or heat
front, and the substrate. This layer provides a shield, which effectively
insulates the substrate from radiant heat, oxygen, and direct contact from
flames.
- Endothermic
absorption. The action of graphite exfoliation is endothermic. Expandable
graphite exposed to heat, particularly from a flame front, will absorb heat
during the exfoliation reaction effectively removing heat from the
source.
- Out-gassing. The
exfoliation reaction is accompanied by out-gassing as intercalation reagents
decompose and escape as gaseous decomposition products. Up to 20% of the
intumescent graphite mass may be lost as non-flammable gaseous products. These
gases may act to displace oxygen in an advancing flame
front.
Intumescent graphite is available in purity ranging from 80-99% carbon. Both
coarse and fine grades are available. The degree of intumescence, also known as
“expandability”, generally ranges from 80-300% volume increase. Coarser grades
expand more than finer grades. Products can be specified as low (acidic),
neutral, and high (alkaline) pH to allow compatibility with a variety of
aqueous and non-aqueous systems.
Although intumescent graphite has been used for many years in various
applications, it is relativity new to the coatings industry. This unique
product may prove to be a keystone in the development of fire retardant
coatings to meet the demands of the 21st century.
2. Crystalline Vein
Graphite
Crystalline vein graphite is unique, as it is believed to be naturally
occurring pyrolytic (deposited from gas or fluid phase) graphite. In coatings
applications, vein graphite may offer superior performance since it has
slightly higher thermal and electrical conductivity, which result from its high
degree of crystalline perfection. Also, vein graphite has good oxidation
resistance and is highly lubricious. Commercial grades are available from
85-99% carbon. Sized materials from 1 inch to 3 micron are
available.
3. Amorphous
Graphite
Amorphous graphite is the least “graphitic” of the natural graphites.
However, the term “amorphous” is a misnomer since this material is truly
crystalline.
Amorphous graphite tends to be much less reflective in both large- and
small-grained sizes. Therefore, it has a darker color, bordering on black,
while other natural graphite has a color closer to “silver-gray.” This makes
amorphous graphite useful in coatings, which require less reflectance. Also,
this graphite variety is typically lower in cost than other types but is still
lubricious, conductive and chemically stable.
4. Synthetic
Graphite
Also know as “artificial graphite,” this variety is a man-made product
and is available in sizes from 1/2 inch to 3 microns. Synthetic graphite is
used in many coatings applications where higher purity is required. It is
compatible with virtually any aqueous or non-aqueous system, has excellent
thermal and electrical conductivity, is chemically inert, and is relativity low
in cost.
Basic Structural Description
Graphite is composed of carbon atoms that are arranged in poly-aromatic,
hexagonal ring arrays. Carbon atoms in these arrays are in the sp2-hybridized
state. These ring arrays form sheets of carbon atoms, and individual sheets are
known as graphene layers. Graphene layers are stacked one on top of another,
perpendicular to the “c” crystallographic axis of the hexagonal system. Within
each graphene layer carbon-to-carbon bonding is strong covalent (shared
electrons) sigma bonding. Individual graphene layers are held in stacked
arrangement by weak, secondary electrical bonds resulting from the overlapping
pi (π) bonds of the sp2 carbon network within each graphene sheet. The high
degree of anisotropy (directional properties) seen in graphite is the result of
the two types of bonding, covalent sigma and covalent pi, each type acting in a
different crystallographic direction.
Anisotropy
Graphite is the classic example of an anisotropic substance. The
anisotropic behavior of graphite is illustrated in its ability to act as a
solid film lubricant. Graphene layers, stacked along the “c” crystallographic
axis, have high inter-layer strength but low intra-layer cohesion. The weak pi
bonding, which holds adjacent sheets in alignment, yields with minimal energy
allowing graphene layers to peel away from each other and the crystal. Groups of
graphene layers cleaved away from a graphite crystal will provide a tough,
impervious, inert, highly lubricious, thin film, which will effectively fill
and “cap” disparities between rubbing surfaces. The film forming properties of
graphite provide a perfect example of the relationship between microscopic form
and macroscopic function.
The anisotropic behavior of graphite is exemplified in virtually all of its
physical and chemical properties. For example, thermal and electrical
conductivity, which result from various modes of within plane electron or
thermal vibration transfer, are very high in the direction parallel with
graphene layer planes (“a” direction). However, in the “c” axis direction no
“ambient” mechanism of electron or thermal vibration transfer exists, resulting
in low electrical and thermal conductivity in this
direction.
Platelet overlap, crystalline imperfections and some randomness in platelet
location in a thin film result in graphite-containing coatings that in reality
do show a degree of through-plane conduction, however parallel plane
conductivity is typically higher.
Chemical Inertness
Graphite is composed of carbon atoms so it will react with atmospheric
oxygen above about 450 ˚C to form carbon dioxide. However, most coating systems
are composed of binders and other additives, which either oxidize or break down
thermally before the oxidation threshold temperature of graphite, is reached.
Even in situations where exposure to high temperatures may occur, graphite has
excellent short-term resistance to oxidation.
Reactivity between most chemical species and graphite is minimal. This high
degree of chemical inertness is a primary attribute of the sp2 hybridized
carbon atoms that make up the graphite structure. Carbon in this form is
stabilized by the so-called “resonance energy” imparted to the structure
through the de-localization of the pi electrons of the sp2 system. Carbon atoms
located within graphene layers have a natural inertness as a result of this
resonance stability. However, carbon atoms located at edge sites, especially
those bonded to heteroatom substituents, are more reactive. Based on this model
chemical reactions typically occur from the “edge in” rather than from the “top
down” of graphene layers.
In a reducing atmosphere graphite is one of the most refractory materials
known. Graphite is stable to well above 3,000 ˚C in a non-oxidizing atmosphere.
Under ambient to moderately high temperatures graphite will not act as a reducing
agent due to the strong interlayer bonding between carbon atoms. The result is
that graphitic carbon is relatively unreactive even when finely divided.
LUMINESCENT ADDITIVES
Luminescent compounds are additives that impart fluorescence or
phosphorescence to coatings. Examples are: materials based on ZnS and hexagonal
wurtzite with bromhexine as an activator. Also used are rare earth aluminates,
ruthenium pyrene or meso-tetrakis-(pentafluorophenyl)porphyrin platinum(II).
LUSTRANT
Agent that promotes more mirror-like reflectance. (The ratio of specular
reflectance to diffuse reflectance is increased.)
MAR-RESISTANCE ADDITIVE
See Slip Aid and Anti-Mar
Chemical compound that enhances or promotes a coating’s ability to
resist damage by light abrasion, impact or pressure. A coating must be able to
interact with its environment without incurring fine surface scratches that mar
or spoil the appearance.
MARPROOFING AGENTS
See Slip Aid and Anti-Mar
MASKING AGENTS
Masking agents are odorants that cover the distinctive or objectionable
odor of specific ingredients in a formulation or a cured coating.
MATTING AGENTS
See Flatting Agents
One of the more interesting applications of nanoparticles is in matte
coatings, a particular challenge in the 100% solids market. Most matting agents
substantially increase viscosity, a problem that is usually addressed by the
addition of either organic thinners or water. Amorphous nanoparticles in a
variety of monomer components are being used to produce a family of additives
for the formulation of matte coatings with nearly zero increase in viscosity.
MICROSPHERES
See Extenders
Microspheres are small, spherical particles
whose size ranges from 12 to 300 microns in diameter; wall thickness can vary
from several microns to as low as 0.1 micron. Microspheres can be solid, porous
or hollow; composed of acrylonitrile, glass, ceramic, phenolic or polymeric
materials; coated or uncoated. Because most are hollow, the true density of
microspheres is lower than that of other non-soluble additives and ranges from
0.60 g/cc to as low as 0.025 g/cc. The spherical shape is one of the unique
features that differentiates these products from other non-soluble additives. A
sphere has the lowest surface area of any shape and, because of this,
microspheres have very low resin demand.
Microspheres
roll past one another like ball bearings, with no rough surfaces or branches to
entangle. At common loadings, there is only a minimal impact on viscosity when
they are added to a liquid. Formulators can use microspheres to increase the
solid content of a coating while maintaining the proper application and flow
characteristics. Higher solids can reduce volatile organic compounds (VOCs),
shrinkage and drying time. The large volume that microspheres displace for a
given weight is an important attribute in their use. Because hollow spheres
will lower the density of materials they are added to, a gallon of coating will
weigh less than the same product made without spheres. Lower-density coatings
are less expensive to ship and easier to carry up a ladder. A low-density
coating will atomize better, give less spatter when rolling, and sag less once
applied. And since a small weight-addition of microspheres increases the batch
volume significantly, formulation cost can be reduced.
Microspheres that are closed-cell, gas-filled particles are extremely good
insulators. This characteristic is imparted to materials that contain
microspheres. Thermal and acoustic insulation properties of coatings or
substrates can be improved by the addition of microspheres. Makers of roof
coatings, fire-retardant materials and sensitive acoustic equipment currently
use this property.
Microspheres have some limitations that must be considered. The large particle
size, compared to some other solid additives, can result in surface texture or
gloss reduction, particularly in thin films. Their low density, the very
property that gives them so many benefits, requires proper training and
handling equipment so that they do not become airborne when adding them into
the batch. Also, there is a tendency for the microspheres to float to the
surface of low-viscosity systems. Proper product selection, viscosity modifiers
and operator training can overcome these issues in most
cases.
Architectural paints containing ceramic microspheres have a lower viscosity,
better flow and improved sprayability due to their spherical shape. The
surfaces that are coated with ceramic microspheres provide a level of soil and
stain resistance typically associated with gloss and semi-gloss paints. These
flat, matte paints produce a finish that is easier to clean than conventional
flat paints because the surface can be scrubbed without burnishing. These
systems are also ideal for large expanses as they reflect light more evenly,
thus offering a uniform appearance.
Microsphere technology targeting aerospace coatings can significantly reduce
the weight of aircraft paints, thus providing savings in fuel consumption.
Weight reduction can have an impact in other coating areas as
well.
Current areas under development are hollow
glass microspheres coated with metals and pigments for application in various
industrial areas. It is expected this technology will continue to grow in
importance.
PPMA
Small spherical beads of polymethylmethacrylate (PMMA) are used as
additives in coatings and inks. The size of the beads and the acrylic
composition provide immediate and excellent dispersion into solvent and
waterborne systems. Sizes range from 20 – 50 mm, which provides visual surface visual effects
along with hardness and improved scratch and abrasion resistance. Other
advantages include transparency, slip and block resistance, and thermal and UV
resistance.
Thermoplastic
Thermoplastic microspheres are compressible, resilient, hollow
particles. The extremely thin shell wall possible with plastic spheres results
in specific gravities as low as 0.025 and allows just a small weight-percent of
these materials to displace large volumes. Because the resilient plastic can deform
under stress, there is virtually no breakage when mixing or pumping these
products, even with high shear mixing. Additionally, the compressible nature of
plastic can absorb impacts that might ordinarily deform the finished product,
thereby reducing damage caused by stone chips, foot traffic or freeze-thaw
cycles.
Glass
Glass bubbles provide the benefits of high heat and chemical resistance.
The walls of glass bubbles are rigid. Products are available in a broad range
of densities from as low as 0.125 g/cc to 0.60 g/cc. The collapse strength of
the glass bubble is directly related to the density, i.e., the higher the
density, the higher the strength. For example, a glass bubble with a density of
0.125 g/cc is rated at 250 psi, whereas one with a density of 0.60 g/cc is
rated at 18,000 psi. In order to minimize both the cost and the weight of the
final product, the appropriate glass bubble is the one that is just strong
enough to survive all of the manufacturing processes and the end use of the
product.
The 18- and 30-micron hollow glass microspheres offer improved scrub and
burnish properties, viscosity control, thermal insulation and sound dampening
characteristics, improved performance and other functional properties previously
unattainable. Because they are made of colorless glass they do not discolor
light or pastel formulations. Their hollow structure, low density (0.60 and
0.34 g/cc) and small particle size make them ideal for use as extenders for
paint formulations.
Paint that is extended with microspheres has a lower viscosity than a paint
filled to an equivalent volume with a non-spherical extender. Spherical
particles have a low-energy surface that minimizes friction and drag. As a
result, an equal volume substitution of these microspheres for irregularly
shaped extenders will decrease the coating’s viscosity. Lower viscosity is a
significant benefit in solventborne systems as it allows formulators to remove
some of the solvent and still maintain a viscosity that facilitates application
and spreading properties.
With particle sizes considerably finer than previously available, microspheres
can be used in thin film coatings to improve integrity. Glass spheres do not
absorb resin and they may be used to improve hiding properties or to replace
some TiO2. The hollow glass spheres redirect the angle of light,
imparting opacity. Depending on the formulation, equivalent tint strength can
be achieved with 5-10% replacement of TiO2.
To achieve the best economics with hollow microspheres, attention to
formulating and mixing technique is necessary. Although higher density glass
microspheres are extremely strong and resist virtually any shear applied, some
consideration may be appropriate when hollow glass microspheres are used in
paint manufacture. With a smooth glass surface, controlled particle size
distribution and low surface area, as well as freedom from agglomerates, the
hollow spheres wet out easily in virtually all systems. Adding spheres at the final
mixing stage is usually best, and only relatively low shear needs to be applied
to get spheres dispersed. Long periods of mixing employing high shear could
result in some breakage of hollow spheres and should be avoided.
MILDEWCIDE
See Biocide/Fungicide
Microbiostatic agents are additives that will prevent the growth of
microorganisms and their spores. It may or may not kill these organisms. A
mildewcide is an additive that prevents growth of mildew on painted or coated surfaces.
In a more loose sense, they are agents that are added to paints to prevent
microbial attack during storage and after use.
MOISTURE BARRIER
Nanoparticles may be used to create barriers to air, water and other
vapors, and various solvents. Such barriers work by filling space. A
combination of nanoparticles and larger-sized particles is particularly
effective for this purpose. By adjusting the percentage of particles or the
application of coating itself, the barriers may be fine-tuned to specifically
block water, air or solvents. Because these coatings do not work through
hydrophobicity, this technique produces surfaces that may be printable and
over-coatable.
Nano-enabled moisture barriers are particularly useful as a tool against
microorganisms that thrive in a moist environment. This is particularly an
issue in the case of flooding where even a few inches of water may be very
damaging to drywall. When water is absorbed by drywall, spores landing on the
paper surface of the drywall access the moisture and grow quickly. Sealing a
porous surface, blocks access to water and limits growth. A coating that acts
against microbes in multiple pathways may be even more effective in that it is
less likely to fall victim to resistant organisms. For example, the addition of
a combination of nano-particle antimicrobials that break down cell walls along
with larger particle additives (such as mixtures of silver and copper) may
create a more effective coating for combating organism growth.
While many organisms may flourish in the presence of moisture, many electronic
displays find it fatal. Conventionally, this problem is solved by using glass
to protect sensitive components. However, glass has drawbacks; namely it is
breakable, heavy and inflexible. Alternatives such as polycarbonate may absorb
water. Serving as air and vapor barriers, coatings with nanoparticles can be
used as a direct replacement to glass for more porous materials
MOISTURE SCAVENGER
See Water Removal
Agents/Scavengers
Moisture that gets trapped in a coating can be a nuisance and/or have
devastating effects on the appearance and performance of the film. Exterior
coatings, in general, can have problems with moisture, but certain coating
applications are more sensitive to this than others. Applicators who are
painting bridges, boats, offshore platforms and so forth are all concerned with
moisture-related problems if they are using moisture-sensitive materials. [Some
urethane systems are formulated to cure in the presence of
moisture.]
Moisture is introduced into the coating in the form of dissolved water in
solvents and other raw materials. Often it is adsorbed water in fillers and
pigments. For high-solids coatings this can have a serious effect because these
coatings systems are higher in solids content. Humidity is a big factor in
creating problems for the applicator using two-component moisture-sensitive
urethanes. For urethane coatings this is particularly important because the
slightest trace of moisture can react with isocyanates to form carbon dioxide
and amines. The amines in turn react with more isocyanate to form
ureas.
Low-solids, two-component systems are generally more forgiving to moisture
contamination. Higher solids systems are not forgiving because the formed
carbon dioxide gas cannot readily escape from the curing product. As a result,
entrapped bubbles or pinholes appear which detract from system performance as
well as appearance. This is especially true for higher build films that are
usually found in industrial maintenance coatings.
If it is desirable to remove or eliminate water from some coatings and raw
materials it can usually be accomplished by one of the following
methods.
1.
Molecular sieves. They provide a physical trapping mechanism to isolate water in the
formulation. These materials are synthetically prepared zeolites that are
characterized by crystalline cavities or pores that are of extremely uniform
dimensions. They are porous alumino-silicates in which silica and aluminum
atoms are joined by oxygen bridges within tetrahedral units. Introduction of
counter ions of sodium, potassium, or calcium into the system results in
negatively charged surfaces that selectively adsorb particular molecules. If
the counterion is potassium, molecules with a diameter of less than three
angstroms (carbon monoxide, helium, and hydrogen) will be absorbed. If the
counterion is calcium, molecules with a diameter of less than 5 angstroms (ethane,
methane, and propane) will be absorbed. The compounds are used in a variety of
ways. Zeolites are naturally occurring alumino-silicates.
2.
PTSI (p-toluenesulfonyl isocyanate) is a low-viscosity, reactive additive
useful as a water scavenger in the formulation of specialty urethane products
such as coatings, adhesives and sealants. The reaction of PTSI with water
generates carbon dioxide and the corresponding toluenesulfonamide, which is
generally inert to further reaction with alkyl and aryl isocyanates. The
sulfonamide is usually soluble in common coating solvents and presents no
significant toxicity hazards. The reaction of PTSI with water introduced from
pigments and solvents in the paint formulation generates carbon dioxide and
soluble inert chemical products. Experience has demonstrated that 13 grams of
PTSI effectively scavenges 1 gram of water, however compatibility with the
binder should always be tested.
PTSI provides the formulator of specialty urethane products with an expedient
and efficient alternative to physical methods of dehydration in common use. It
is also recommended for the storage stabilization of purified diisocyanates
against deterioration or discoloration. It can be used for: moisture-curing
prepolymers, catalyzed prepolymers, prepolymer and polyol systems, urethane
alkyd production and urethane lacquer production.
Both one- and two-part systems can be formulated with PTSI as a scavenger for
water introduced with solvents, pigments and fillers. The reactivity of PTSI
toward active hydrogen atoms makes it useful as a scavenger for water and other
isocyante reactive groups such as free acid in powdered aluminum alkanoates and
active hydrogen present in carbon black pigments, which causes polyurethane
coatings to thicken during storage.
3. Oxazolidines . These ketone-based
compounds chemically react to eliminate water. Oxazolidines remove the
microbubbles without creating haze. In addition, gloss development and gloss
retention is good, as well as distinctness of image (DOI) even under humid
conditions.
4.
Moisture scavengers in the form of hygroscopic silicas are used to scavenge water and
prevent the oxidation of aluminum pigments and resulting instability, appearance
and gassing problems in aluminum paints.
MOLECULAR SIEVES
See Moisture Scavenger
Molecular sieves are also used as water scavengers. They are composed of
crystalline aluminosilicates that have cavities that are interconnected by
common openings or windows. Their function of water scavenging is independent
of temperature.
NANOTECHNOLOGY
See UV Absorbers/Abrasion
Resistance
The latest buzzwords in the industry are ‘smart’ and ‘nano’. Both terms
are appearing with regularity and are bringing some very innovative technology
to the world of functional coatings. Improving the protective nature of
coatings or creating new properties in coatings by adding small amounts of
nanoadditives will be the future of nanotechnology in this
area.
Nano means one-billionth and, by definition, for nanotechnology we are looking
at particles whose size ranges from 0.1 to 100 nanometers. It is hard to get
our mental image around the concept of a billionth. By way of reference, the
human hair is approximately 50,000 nanometers across and a bacterial cell is a
few hundred nanometers across. A nanosecond is one billionth of a second and is
a common measurement of read or write access time to random access memory
(RAM). Time is currently measured in even lower increments such as picoseconds,
femtoseconds and attoseconds – a 1 followed by 18 zeros.
At the nano level, the traditional physical and chemical properties of
materials, as we know and understand them, all change. For example, all the
properties we might attribute to the element gold, for instance, would not be
true at the nano level, including its color, which, at ~5 nm, would be red. The
implications of course are that we can construct and build whole new systems
with different properties when dealing with nano-sized
material.
This change in physical properties is attributed to a change in the electronic
properties of matter. Electrons are confined in a smaller space causing these
changes to occur. Nanotechnology deals with those electronic effects. At the
same time the surface area of nanomaterial is enhanced by orders of magnitude
so that surface effects become a critical aspect in nanotechnology.
Stabilization of individual units as well as the surface activity becomes
important when using nanomaterials.
There are examples of nano materials around us in use today. For the most part
we are not even aware of them. One example is zeolites, which are very common
and have been in use for quite some time, particularly as water softeners.
Their nanopore structure accounts for their capability and success. Some
companies have been developing and using multilayer films where each layer
(10-20 nanometers thick) is applied at the nanoscale level. The layers create
an almost perfect reflective mirror and are used inside LCD displays today –
for example in the laptops. This technology has been on the market for
years.
Coatings with nanoparticles can be used to increase the scratch and abrasion
resistance of the surface, used to increase corrosion resistance and used for
anti-reflective coating properties. There are applications for furniture
coatings and flooring coatings. Nanoparticles can have a significant advantage
over traditional fillers. The impact on polymer design may also be of great
significance as properties such as heat resistance, stiffness, strength,
electrical conductivity etc., can be engineered and controlled. In fact
polymers can be custom made and tailored to fit the need.
One of the most advanced markets in the field of nanotechnology is in the area
of modifying surface properties using nanotechnology.
Only well-dispersed individual units of nanomatter behave like nanomaterial in
the best way. Even slight aggregation can cause the loss of all nanoeffects.
For that reason pre-dispersed nanoparticle master batches are an ideal way to
utilize nanomaterials in coatings. By using only small amounts of the active
ingredient and by achieving very high active ingredient contents in the master
batch, nanoadditives provide a smart way to introduce new or enhanced coating
properties.
Certain nanosized oxides, well dispersed into a coating formulation, can
significantly impact the mechanical properties of the coating. Nanosized
alumina and silica is of great interest because high-gloss high-transparent
coatings can be achieved by using nanosized fillers instead of micron-sized
materials.
When incorporating a small amount of nanoalumina in a UV-curable coating system
the resistance against mechanical scratching can be increased significantly. If
the combination of alumina nanoparticles and polysiloxane-based additive is
used, the scratch resistance is improved dramatically. Just 1.5% alumina
nanoparticles in combination with 0.2% surface-active polysiloxane-based
additive is sufficient to reach an excellent scratch resistance. The specific
combination of nanoparticles and additives gives the best scratch resistance.
The extent of this effect depends on the chemical nature of the matrix and on
the additive structure and composition.
Currently the focus on the use of nanomaterials besides scratch resistance
includes UV stabilization, anti-microbial activity, IR absorbance, or
conductivity/anti-static properties of coatings.
Inorganic UV-Absorbers
Inorganic UV-absorbers are frequently used in coatings. Three different
materials are under intensive development: nanosized titania, nanosized ZnO and
nanosized cerium dioxide.
The materials differ in price, performance and absorption characteristics. The
most expensive material is cerium. In addition, cerium is an oxidation catalyst
– a property currently used in the field of mechanical-chemical planarization
(CMP) of semiconductor wafers. The catalytic activity combined with the high
cost of raw materials are the two major drawbacks when thinking about the use
of cerium dioxide in coatings. Titania is less expensive than cerium, but as
pure rutile it is photoactive under UV-radiation. The formation of radicals
leads to a decomposition of organic materials. For that reason titania must be
coated and doped in order to quench the radical formation. Looking at the
absorbance characteristics of nano titania, the absorbance edge is around
320-350 nm which is in the UV-A region.
Compared to ZnO the last of the three inorganic UV absorbers, titania has a
higher absorption coefficient but is more transparent in the near UV-A region.
ZnO very effectively blocks radiation below 400 nm while being less expensive
compared to the two other oxides.
There are advantages of inorganic nanosized UV absorbers. Due to the nanosize
of the particles, the gloss and the color of the coating in not effected when
adding less than 2% of, for example, ZnO. Even with initially equally good
performance of the inorganic and organic UV absorbers, especially over a long
lifetime, the inorganic will out-perform the organic absorbers simply because
they do not decompose by photochemical reaction induced by UV
light.
In the short and midterm future nanotechnology will influence our life more and
more. Simply by changing the size of currently existing materials, new,
improved, or enhanced properties occur that can be taken advantage of.
ODORANTS
Odorants are chemical compositions that confer a specific odor to a
formulation.
OILS
Oils have various functions depending on their ability to form films or
alter a variety of paint properties. Drying oils from vegetable oil or animal
sources have been used as sole binders and modifiers for other resins (linseed,
tung and fish oils). Semi-drying vegetable oils are used primarily in the
manufacture of other oxidizing resins (soya bean and safflower oils). Non-drying
oils are used in plasticizing alkyds and in blends with other resins in baking
systems (raw castor, coconut and cottonseed oils). Mineral oils are used as
basic building blocks in defoamers for latex paints or as a VOC-free
non-volatile portion of water repellants. Silicone oils are used in surface
lubricants, anti-blocking additives, and scratch/mar resistant additives. Pure
silicone oil is very effective, but often causes many other problems due to
contamination. See specific additives for more information.
OPTICAL BRIGHTENERS
See
Brightener
Optical brighteners are fluorescent compounds that absorb near
ultraviolet radiation and then reemit it as violet-blue light that gives
yellowish-white coatings a brighter, whiter appearance. Small amounts of blue
dyes are also used to achieve the same result.
ORANGE PEEL PREVENTER
Chemical compound that prevents the occurrence of the surface defect
characterized by irregular waviness in the film resembling the texture of an
orange skin. Orange peel is usually caused by improper or insufficient flow of
the coating on the substrate surface. There can be many causes for this ranging
from improper atomization of the coating during a spray operation, excessive
coating thickness without adequate flowout, improper drying conditions or the
surface of the substrate itself may be dirty or not properly prepared. Adding a
surfactant to a waterborne system can often help eliminate orange peel; certain
silicone additives may also be effective in solventborne systems.
ORGANOCLAYS
See Thickeners
Organoclay is a modified clay such as
montmorillonite bentonite clay that has been organically modified to produce an
organophilic clay. A variety of organically modified clays are available. These
allow the material to be added to a variety of organic solvent systems and to
generate thixotropic viscosity and thus control of sag and settling. Typically
organoclays are added in amounts of 0.5% to 5%. They allow a gel structure to
form under nil and low shear conditions, and when shear is applied to this
system, the gel structure breaks down and viscosity decreases. When the
shearing force is removed, the gel structure reforms.
pH-CONTROL AGENTS
Chemical compounds used to raise, lower or buffer the pH of waterborne
compositions.
The pH of a latex must be controlled within a certain range for stability. The
alkanolamines are most commonly used, in particular: 2-amino-2-methyl-1-propanol
(AMP), Advantex™, Vantex-T, monoethanolamine (MEA) and methylaminoethanol
(MAE).
Other than ammonia, alkanolamines play an important role as the primary
evaporative neutralizing agents used in waterborne coatings. The adjustment of
pH in waterborne coatings is important in order to maintain a stable pigment
dispersion, minimize corrosion, reduce biological growth and generally optimize
the performance of the coating during storage and application. After
application of the wet coating, the pH adjusting agent must, at least
partially, evaporate from the film in order to promote the coalescence of the
resin binders via a decrease in pH.
Alkanolamines are ideal pH neutralizing agents in a number of ways, including
compatibility with latex emulsions, solubility in latex emulsions, a
sufficiently high pKa value to allow for efficient neutralization to pH values
between 8 and 10, and intermediate vapor pressures that allow for evaporation
at a controlled rate. The optimum alkanolamine for a given coating formulation
will be the one with the best balance of physical properties, allowing for the
maximum number of benefits and the minimum number of negative side effects
(e.g., odor).
Only certain alkanolamines are exceptional with respect to their ability to
improve latex paint through significant positive impact on odor, corrosion
properties, adhesion, biostability, pigment stability, coalescence and overall
performance.
The influence of alkanolamines on adhesion is significant; comparative
waterborne coating formulations that differ only in their alkanolamine content
have markedly different adhesion properties on plastics. Better surface
affinity of a liquid coating for a solid equates to better overall chemical
adhesion of the coating to the solid. Some alkanolamines, despite their low
percent composition in the coating, have a significant impact on the
interfacial properties of the coating and have a significant effect on the
adhesion of dried waterborne coatings on plastics. Alkanolamines with mid-range calculated HLB values yield coatings
with lower solid/liquid contact angles and measurably better
adhesion.
The pKa of the alkanolamine used in a waterborne coating has an influence on
the performance of the coating. Higher pKa alkanolamines allow for more
efficient neutralization and higher working pH levels while lower pKa
alkanolamines have some utility as reserve alkalinity in open industrial
systems.
There are other hindered amines (trifunctional molecule) that are good pH
buffers, offer good storage stability, neutralize waterborne resins, improve
thickener performance, control viscosity, aid in pigment dispersion, and are
able to offer decreased dispersant costs and overall additive cost compared to ammonia
in waterborne coatings systems.
Care must be exercised using slowly volatilizing amines because they can cause
blocking, early water sensitivity, or after tack problems under poor drying
conditions. In some circumstances, ammonia, TEA or DEA are more suitable.
PHOTOINITIATORS
Molecules that, when subjected to ultraviolet radiation, generate
chemical species capable of initiating polymerization.
Photoinitiators are compounds used in the ultraviolet or visible radiation
curing processes. These compounds absorb radiation, are raised to an
electronically excited state, and then photolyze (degrade) into an active
species, cations, free radicals, or both, that are capable of initiating
polymerization of monomers and functional oligomers in the
formulation.
Free-radical photoinitiators are compounds that absorb ultraviolet or visible
radiation and photolyze directly through a unimolecular reaction or indirectly
through a bimolecular reaction. In the unimolecular reaction, the
photoinitiator is split into one or more free radicals. In the bimolecular
reaction, there is hydrogen abstraction from a synergist molecule, usually an
amine with an alpha-carbon atom, which becomes the actual initiating free
radical species. Typical amine synergists are: methyl diethanol amine, dibutyl
ethanol amine, triethyl amine and triethanol amine. These react synergistically
with hydrogen-abstracting photoinitiators such as benzophenone or isopropyl
thioxanthone. The free radicals formed are capable of initiating the rapid
polymerization of ethylenically unsaturated compounds such as acrylates.
Typical of the direct type is 2,2-diethoxyacetophenone and typical of the
indirect type is benzophenone used in combination with an alpha-carbon-containing
amine synergist such as triethyl amine.
Cationic photoinitiators are compounds that absorb ultraviolet radiation and
photolyze directly into Lewis or Brönsted acids that are capable of initiating
the rapid polymerization of compounds such as the cycloaliphatic epoxides,
other epoxides and vinyl ethers. Most cationic photoinitiators are of the
Brönsted acid type, i.e., chemicals that photolyze into cations – compounds
that have a positive charge such as a hydrogen ion, H+. These protonic acids
are capable of causing very rapid polymerization of epoxides and vinyl ethers
as well as copolymerization of cycloaliphatic epoxides with polyols. Most
cationic photoinitiators also generate free radicals that are capable of
polymerizing ethylenic unsaturation such as is found in acrylates. Examples of
cationic photoinitiators are the aryl sulfonium metallic salts, as aryl
sulfonium hexafluorophosphate and aryl sulfonium hexafluoroantimonate, and the
aryl iodonium metallic salts, such as diaryl iodonium
hexafluoroantimonate.
Bis-acyl phosphine oxide (BAPO) photoinitiators are suitable for pigmented
systems, thick or UV-stabilized clear coats and daylight
curing.
UV Powder Coatings
The proper selection of photoinitiator depends on its adaptability to
the powder process and its ability to be photoactive in clear and pigmented
systems. Both solid BAPO and HHMP do not seem to adversely affect the softening
point of a powder coating resin. In addition, HHMP exhibits minimal yellowing
in a clear system.
PHOTOSENSITIZERS
Photosensitizers are organic compounds used in combination with
photoinitiators. The photosensitizers are capable of absorbing radiation of a
particular wavelength and thus being raised from a ground state to an excited
state, and then emitting radiation of a wavelength that can activate a
photoinitiator present in a formulation. After the excited photoinitiator emits
radiation, it falls to either a lower energy level or to its original ground
state. Photosensitizers are used when radiation of a particular wavelength is
available and though the compound is excited by the radiation, it is not
capable of photolyzing. However, it can emit radiation to the photoinitiator at
a different wavelength and cause its photolysis.
PIGMENTS
Pigments are ground materials that are dispersed in paints to provide
bulk, color and hiding. The primary pigments are used to add whiteness and
color. Titanium dioxide is the most widely used white pigment. Colored pigments
are of two types – organic and inorganic. Organic pigments provide brighter
colors but are less durable than inorganic pigments. There are a large number
of colors available and these might be exemplified by copper phthalocyanine
blue, thioindigoid reds, and azo-based oranges. Inorganic, colored pigments are
compounds such as iron oxide reds, iron blue, chrome yellow and green and the
umbers.
PINHOLE PREVENTATIVE
A chemical agent used to prevent the occurrence of small pore-like flaws
extending entirely through a film having the appearance of pinpricks.
PLASTICIZERS
A material used to increase the flexibility or elongation of an
inherently brittle film or to improve flow and processability or reduce
brittleness in plastic compositions. Great care must be taken in the choice and
level of plasticizer due to possible unwanted side effects such as after-tack,
blocking, dirt pick-up and finger printing.
Plasticizers are used in the coatings
industry to increase the flexibility or distensibility (elongation) of a
polymer or coating. This can often be recognized in films as offering greater
impact resistance, toughness and adhesion. The organic plasticizers are usually
moderately high-molecular-weight materials (liquids) or low-melting solids. By
imparting some degree of flexibility to the resin, film cracking can usually be
minimized.
The mechanism(s) by which
plasticizers actually work has been theorized by many. There is general belief
that smaller molecules have surrounding them a higher proportion of “free
volume” than larger polymeric structures, which tend to be rather resistant to
movement. By adding smaller, plasticizer molecules into the resin blend the
free volume within the blend is increased and, thereby, permits easier internal
motion of macromolecules – resulting in a more flexible film. The action of the
plasticizer is such that it appears to actually solvate various points along
the polymer chain. It is also felt that this is a very dynamic condition – in
other words that the plasticizer molecules are attached to a given group and
then are displaced and replaced by other groups and so
forth.
The addition of plasticizer lowers the softening point – Tg – of the
resin. This can give elongation properties to the resin and subsequent coating,
such that the film can withstand shock or impact resistance. Some emulsions are
very hard and a plasticizer is required to ensure proper film formation.
Primary plasticizers are those which are
highly compatible with a given resin system. Secondary plasticizers are those,
which upon aging, tend to form droplets or give internal cloudiness or bloom as
a crystalline surface.
In general, the phthalic anhydride esters – or phthalates – have been
used widely throughout the coatings industry as general-purpose plasticizers.
The most commonly known are the dibutyl phthalates and dioctyl phthalate.
Obviously, whole arrays of plasticizers exist and are chosen for use based on
specific performance and/or price considerations.
Examples of plasticizers are: abietates, adipates, benzoates, castor oil,
epoxidized soybean oil (which can also act as an acid scavenger), phosphates,
phthalates, polymeric phthalates, sebacates, and so forth. Acrylic esters of
aliphatic dicarboxylic acids, in particular adipic and sebacic acids, provide
excellent elasticity in coatings even at low temperatures. They are often mixed
with the phthalate plasticizers.
In selecting the proper plasticizer for a given resin system, the following
factors will influence the effectiveness of the
plasticizer:
- presence or absence of
specific functional groups in the resin;
- polarity and hydrogen
bonding ability of functional groups;
- stearic
hindrance;
- molecular
weight.
Plasticizers are not permanently bonded to the resin in a coatings system;
therefore they can often be extracted in part from a coating for purposes of
analysis. Many types of plasticizers will extract with water as a polar
solvent. Nonpolar solvents such as hexane are also often
used.
Plasticizers have been known to migrate from one polymeric material to another
if there is compatibility between them. Plasticizers are very mobile compounds
and can easily diffuse. Adipates and phthalates have been known to migrate from
vinyl upholstery, handbags and so forth to lacquers and soften or destroy the
surface coating. They can migrate into food and beverages, and sometimes affect
odor and taste. Some plasticizers tend to migrate to the surface under
conditions of high temperature and humidity. A type of water-plasticizer blend
occurs that makes the surface feel sticky.
In recent years, ortho-phthalate plasticizers such as BBP and DBP have become
targets of consumer groups that have demanded the removal of these additives in
products that range from toys to coatings. In December 2005, the California
Office of Environmental Health Hazard Assessment (OEHHA) added BBP and DBP,
along with di-n-hexyl phthalate (DnHP) to the Proposition 65 list of chemicals
as being “known to the state to cause reproductive toxicity,” prompting
manufacturers to seek alternative products.
As a result, formulators are looking for non ortho-phthalate alternatives for
their coatings. While there are several plasticizers on the market that are
compatible with solventborne systems, there are very few that are compatible
with both solvent- and waterborne systems. Fewer still have a boiling point
over 300 °C to ensure that the plasticizer will remain in the film over an
extended period to maintain film flexibility.
There are newer, non-phthalate alternatives,
such as some newer coalescents, on the market today with similar boiling points
that are compatible with both solvent- and waterborne systems. In addition,
they can help formulators meet a number of environmental
regulations.
Another benefit of this type of additive is that it not only keeps the
films flexible but it also aids in film formation of latex systems. This is an
important benefit to formulators who are under constant pressure to reduce VOC
in coatings. Additives such as co-solvents, thickeners, preservatives and
lower-boiling plasticizers can add to the VOC level of the coating. Solvents
are also used as fugitive plasticizers.
For powder coatings, the purpose is to reduce
the viscosity of a binder to enhance flow and leveling. The types used are
mainly derivatives of benzoic acid; others used include toluene sulfonamide,
dicyclohexyl phthalate and epoxidized soy oil. The levels are usually 1.0-5.0%
of the binder.
POLYMERIC DISPERSANT
See Dispersant
POLYMERIC LIQUID CRYSTALS
Polymeric Liquid Crystals (PLCs) are synthetic versions of natural
cholesteric nematic liquid crystals. They are available in a translucent,
off-white powder form that has little if any color. However, when these
materials are added at about a 3% level to conventional colored pigments, i.e.,
in combination with the pigments, in a coating formulation, they create a
change in color when the coating is viewed from various angles. PLCs are
nematic liquid crystal materials that are attached via a crosslinking mechanism
to a chiral compound that acts as a template to form a helix structure. This
process fixes the optical and physical properties of the molecules and makes a
chemically and thermally stable structure.
PRESERVATIVE
See Biocide/Fungicide
A substance used to prevent the growth of microorganisms in or on any
kind of substrate. Preservatives are compounds that will slow down the
biodeterioration of a material that will result in loss of viscosity and/or
putrefaction during storage. They are used to “preserve” aqueous formulations
that are susceptible to attack by bacteria and fungi such as yeast as well as
filamentous fungi. Such attack can cause discoloration, gassing, gelation,
odors, slime formation and viscosity loss. Metal salts are among the compounds
used as preservatives.
Copper-8-quinolinolate is the active ingredient that has been used in wood
preservatives for years. Copper-8-containing preservatives have demonstrated
outstanding control of mold, mildew and wood decay in a host of environments. The
copper-8-containing preservatives are finding increasing acceptance as
environmentally acceptable alternatives to such commonly used preservatives as
chromated copper arsenate (CCA) and pentachlorophenol. Copper-8 chemistry is
unique in that it has earned the approval of the U.S. FDA for use in indirect
food contact applications.
PROTECTIVE COLLOIDS
Materials such as gums, starches and proteins, polyacrylates, and
cellulose and cellulose derivatives that are effective agents for protecting
charged colloidal particles in aqueous media against flocculation.
PUFFING AGENTS
Materials added to paints to increase the apparent (low shear)
viscosity, usually post-added to correct viscosity of production batches under
low-shear mixing.
REACTIVE DILUENT
A viscosity reducer, which becomes a permanent part of the coating
through chemical reaction with other constituents of the formula, and does not
significantly increase the VOC of the system.
Reactive diluents are used in a variety of coatings such as waterborne,
high-solids and radiation cure. Their main function is to decrease application
viscosity and to become an integral part of the final protective or decorative
coating by chemical reaction with itself or with other components of the
formulation. It does this without significantly increasing the VOC of the
system. Basically, a reactive diluent functions as a solvent but does not cause
VOC increases as a solvent does.
In waterborne coatings, reactive diluents are mainly used to replace
co-solvents and coalescing agents. In high-solids and radiation-curable
coatings, the main function of reactive diluents is to decrease viscosity for
ease in application. They can also act as crosslinking agents as well as
flexibilizers and hardness modifiers.
Ideally reactive diluents will have a narrow molecular weight distribution
(often they will be a single compound), low viscosity that will impart maximum
viscosity reduction, and miscibility with a variety of other compounds,
including polymers and crosslinking agents. Functionality will vary, but it is
usually greater than one, and the nature of the functionality will depend on
the particular system being modified.
The epoxy reactive diluents are commonly mono- or di-epoxides derived from
aliphatic alcohols or glycols, or phenols. Most diluents decrease the
glass-transition temperature (Tg), the chemical resistance, the water
absorption and other physical properties of the cured resin. However, when used
in moderation, the limited reduction in properties is usually
acceptable.
The most commonly used epoxy reactive diluent is probably Epoxide 8, derived
from a C12-C14 alcohol. While this additive is effective
in reducing viscosity, it has two drawbacks in addition to those applicable to
diluents in general. It slows down the reaction with the curing agent and tends
to facilitate solidification of the epoxy resin.
Two reactive diluents that are less known but possess interesting properties
are p-tert-butylphenyl glycidyl ether (p-TBGE) and cardanol glycidyl
ether.
p-TBGE reduces the solidification of epoxides, has good reactivity and does not
reduce the heat resistance to the same extent as other reactive diluents. A 20%
addition of this diluent will still give a heat distortion temperature of 74 ˚C
to a bisphenol-A resin cured with triethylenetetramine while a 20% addition of
a C8-C10 alkyl glycidyl ether will give a heat distortion
temperature of just 56 ˚C.
Cardanol glycidyl ether is derived from a phenol with a C15 chain in
the meta-position. It has very low volatility and imparts good flexibility to
the cured resin.
Glycidyl epoxides crosslink into thermosetting materials by combining with
various hardening agents such as amines, anhydrides, and polyamides in the
presence of catalytic curing agents. The desired properties in the ultimate
finished products are obtained by selecting the appropriate combination of
epoxide(s) and hardener. Excellent chemical resistance, good electrical
properties and toughness are common to nearly all epoxy
systems.
Epoxy systems of the bisphenol A-epichlorohydrin type and epoxy novalac type
generally lack flexibility. There are a number of proprietary, flexible,
low-viscosity epoxides that can be used to modify the above types to provide
better impact resistance, elongation or flexibility. These flexible epoxides
react completely with epoxy curing agents and become a permanent part of the
cured system. However, they do not contribute toward lowering
costs.
It is often necessary and desirable to alter an epoxy formulation for one or
more reasons:
- to alter viscosity of
the epoxide; increase the level of filler loading;
- improve pot life and
reduce exotherms;
- improve certain
physical properties such as impact and adhesive peel
strength;
- flexibilize, reduce
surface tension, improve system wetting action; and reduce cost of the
formulation.
Diluents and viscosity modifiers for epoxides may be classified as: reactive
diluents; viscosity modifiers; plasticizers, extenders and non-reactive
diluents; and organometallic esters.
Some of the most widely used reactive diluents are based on derivatives of
glycidyl ethers. To be effective, the diluent should react with the curing
agent at almost the same rate as the epoxide, contribute substantial viscosity
reduction at low concentrations, and be nonreactive with the epoxide under
normal storage conditions.
Butyl glycidyl ether is most acceptable because maximum viscosity reduction is
obtained with a minimum concentration. It contains reactive glycidyl groups
that react with the epoxide, and it is therefore incorporated in the binder
portion of the cured formulation. A number of proprietary, formulated epoxides
are marketed with certain percentages of this reactive diluent to give a lower
initial viscosity system. The amount of curing agent used with such systems is
calculated on the total epoxide equivalents of the blend. Reactive diluents generally
decrease the properties of cured epoxy compounds.
Viscosity modifiers are used to improve thermal and mechanical shock, increase
elongation, and obtain higher impact strength and flexibility. Usually, there
is some sacrifice of physical strength, electrical properties and chemical or
solvent resistance, and elevated temperature performance. Flexible epoxides or
monofunctional epoxide compounds are examples of reactive epoxide-type
modifiers. They can be used at ratios up to 1:1 to obtain a flexible and
rubbery cured epoxy compound. They are shelf-stable when blended with the
formulation.
Modifiers that may be reactive as curing agents are often used. Among these are
triphenyl phosphite, liquid polysulfide polymers and various polyamides.
High-molecular-weight aliphatic polyamines, which are also widely used, cure
the epoxide system slowly at room temperatures and usually must be heated to
reduce their viscosity for easy blending with the epoxide.
The polysulfide polymers react slowly with the epoxides when used alone. One to
three parts of an active catalytic amine, or amine salt, is used to accelerate
cure. Triphenyl phosphite reduces viscosity and somewhat reduces ultimate cost
of a compound. Although reactive with epoxides, it is not effective as a curing
agent by itself. A polyfunctional amine is necessary to effect a satisfactory
cure.
Acrylate polymers and certain poly(vinyl butyral), silicone fluids, titanate
esters and fluorocarbon compounds are used as flow-control agents in
epoxide-based powder coatings to modify the surface tension of the film in the
melt stage preventing crater formation and improving substrate
wetting.
Vernonia oil is derived from the seed of Vernonia galamensis, a plant native to
Africa. The oil is chemically similar to epoxidized soybean and linseed oil.
Although the two modified seed oils are widely used in coatings, they are
highly viscous. By contrast, vernonia oil has a low viscosity and is pourable
below 32 ˚F. It has shown great potential as a reactive diluent in very low-VOC
alkyd paint systems.
Illustrative of some systems in which reactive diluents have been used is the
following. Functional siloxanes are used to modify automotive clearcoats and
provide exterior durability, which often means improved resistance to acid
rain. Fatty acid diols are often used to increase the solids of isocyanate crosslinked
systems. Monofunctional epoxides and oxetanes are used to reduce the viscosity
of cationic radiation-cure formulations. In these systems, the monofunctional
epoxide will react into the system and produce a hydroxyl group, which will
also react. Thus, in effect the initially monofunctional compound is
difunctional in nature. Compounds such as 2,7-octadienol are said to be used as
reactive diluents for unsaturated alkyds.
RELEASE AGENT
See Anti-Blocking
RETENTION AIDS
Retention aids are compounds that slow down the surface evaporation rate
and prevent entrapment of carrier, solvent or water, under a solidified surface
layer, prevent pigment flocculation, alleviate blocking of spray nozzles, and
alleviate blocking of printing screens. High-boiling solvents and thickeners
that have the capability of retaining and holding water are used. Examples of
high-boiling solvents used are glycol ethers, propylene glycol, diethylene
glycol, polyoxyethylene glycols, sucrose, and some urea
derivatives.
All of these compounds are capable of quite
strongly associating with water and keep the surface wet. Many of these
compounds are adducts of ethylene oxide and an alcohol or glycol, i.e., the
glycol ethers and polyoxyethylene glycols. Each ethylene oxide unit is capable
of associating with two or three water molecules. These water molecules tend to
be retained for reasonable time periods and are only slowly given up, which
maintains a wet surface. Thickeners such as polysaccharides and cellulose
ethers have similar water retention properties and are used as retention aids.
Many retention aids also function as “wet-edge extenders.”
Although retention aids are high boiling in nature, they do volatilize
at least to some degree that is dependent on the particular compound used,
temperature and time. Thus, this may be a factor to consider in the VOC sense
and may negate using terms such as “solvent-free” or “no VOC” when discussing
the paint product. (See also Humectants.)
RHEOLOGY MODIFIERS
See Thickeners; Sag Control
Agents
Rheology is the study of flow and deformation of matter. Rheology
modifiers are chemicals that alter the deformation and flow characteristics of
matter when it is under the influence of stress. A basic understanding of
coatings rheology is essential to the development of acceptable flow properties
in a coating. In coatings formulations and manufacturing, rheological additives
control rheology.
The rheology (viscosity as a function of applied shear) of a coating determines
many of the properties such as anti-settling of pigments, color stability,
application performance (including sag), and flow and leveling. Viscosity/shear
rate curves are often used to characterize the rheological behavior of coating
systems.
It is important to note the three main viscosity profiles used to describe the
rheological behavior of resins in solutions: pseudoplastic (sheer thinning),
dilatant (shear thickening) and Newtonian (shear has no effect on viscosity).
Pseudoplasticity is often referred to as thixotropy.
Pseudoplastic systems recover quickly after shear is removed, while thixotropic
systems take longer to build viscosity back up and do not recover the same
level of viscosity. Because each profile has advantages and disadvantages,
combinations of rheological additives are used to optimize final coating
properties.
Viscosity is constant at all shear rates for a Newtonian fluid; this flow
behavior is typical of solvents and oils. Dilatant flow shows a viscosity
increase as the shear rate is increased and is characterized by solutions of
PVC (polyvinyl chloride resins) in solvent or plasticizer. This type of flow
can damage equipment. The viscosity approaches infinity as the shear rate
increases in the same direction.
Pseudoplastic flow is highlighted by a viscosity decrease as the shear rate
increases. Such a material is said to be shear thinning. A brush-applied
system, for example, needs high viscosity at low shear rates to remain on the
brush but must thin out for ease of incorporation. In addition to these
effects, pigment settling at low shear rates is minimized with high viscosity
formulations. Package appearance and how paint “feels” when stirred are
typically low shear-rate phenomena. Rheology control additives are used to
impart this flow behavior.
A thixotropic coating exhibits a viscosity decrease as shear rate is increased.
The longer this material is sheared the lower the viscosity, until a limiting
value is reached. This behavior is due to a loss of structure in the coating
system. This loss in viscosity is usually temporary and time dependent in a
true thixotropic system. The system will rebuild to its original state given enough
time (minutes to hours). The generated curve is commonly called a thixotropic
loop or hysteresis loop. The area of the loop is a measure of the degree of
thixotropy for the system.
Rheological control additives can completely dictate the paint flow properties
in the ultra-low shear rate range (sag, leveling and settling) and the low
shear rate range (increased package viscosity). A polymer solution affects the
high-shear rate viscosity of a system. Therefore, as molecular weight of the
polymer increases, high-shear rate viscosity of the system increases (the
converse is also true). High pigment loadings also tend to raise high-shear
rate viscosity.
Rheology modifiers for waterborne coatings are polymeric thickeners that are
associative, flocculative or hydrodynamic in character and comprise compounds
such has hydroxyethyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, hydrophobe-modified
nonionic surfactants and cellulosics, and the like.
Conventional rheological modifiers for solventborne coatings include
organoclays, fumed silica, organic thixotropes and overbased calcium sulfonate.
Commonly encountered rheological additives in waterborne systems include
organoclays, castor oil derivatives, fumed silicas and water reducible
cellulose esters.
Ideally, rheology modifiers would:
a. have minimal impact on the package viscosity of the
coating;
b. provide anti-sag control at elevated temperatures; and
c. not detract from the final film properties.
See Thickeners for more detail about these additives.
RUST INHIBITORS
See Corrosion Inhibitor/Anti-Rust Agent
SAG CONTROL AGENTS
See Rheology Modifiers; Thickeners
Glossy coatings, such as automotive clear coats, require a perfectly smooth,
high-quality appearance after curing. It is necessary that surface
irregularities arising from the substrate, created during application and/or
curing and drying, be eliminated. Paint thixotropy is critical in increasing sag
resistance, thus improving coating appearance and providing a wider application
window. Thixotropy can be introduced by the addition of sag control agents
(SCAs).
Sag control agents based on the reaction product of
1,6-hexamethylenediisocyanate (HDI), and benzylamine yielded the so called
‘opaque’ SCA, named after its opalescent appearance in paint. The opaque SCA
crystalline particles form a weak 3-D network in the paint, which is disrupted
under shear and when shear is decreased will build up again in a certain period
of time, thus providing thixotropic behavior. At higher temperatures (> 100
˚C) these HDI-BA crystals completely melt or dissolve and become fully
transparent in the final coating and therefore applicable in clear coats.
There are two key properties of SCAs: (1) the ability of the crystal particle
to form weak, 3-D networks and (2) the ability to completely disappear (for
di-urea type SCAs to melt and/or dissolve at higher temperatures). New SCAs
have been developed based on optically active (chiral) amines, which are more
efficient (the percent SCA needed to obtain a given amount of sag resistance)
than the opaque SCAs. Mixtures of SCAs can have a wide range of melting
temperatures and offer process efficiency advantages. These new SCAs allow
tuning of the paint fluidity during the different stages in the flash-off
drying and curing process.
SCRATCH-RESISTANT ADDITIVE
See Abrasion-Resistant Additive
SEAL COATING ADDITIVE
Seal, or barrier, coatings are asphalt or coal tar emulsion-based
coatings. They are used to protect airport, driveways, parking lots, and
similar surfaces. Particular latex additives are used to increase usage
lifetime by improving chemical resistance and mechanical
properties.
Additives are used for: thickening; altering drying characteristics; skid
resistance; salt and other chemical resistance as from jet fuel; deicing
chemicals; oil, grease and the like; color uniformity in sunlight and shade;
exterior elemental resistance to rain, ice and snow; texture, and physical
properties such as elongation, flexibility, and toughness. Specific additives
include the following.
- Latexes that produce
thickening and bulk, which improves suspension of sand or other aggregate to
alter texture and/or skid resistance and improve drying time by a water
exclusion process, which in turn improves uniform dry color. Depending on the
particular latex selected, the polymeric materials may improve low temperature
flexibility and toughness as well as reduce tack at elevated temperatures, plus
provide improved resistance to a variety of chemicals.
- Acrylic polymer and
copolymer latexes have the capability to provide all of the performance
characteristics. Butyl, natural and styrene-butadiene rubber latexes have been
used for many years to improve most of the above properties. They fail if used
in areas that have major contact with oils, grease, hydraulic fluid, etc. As
might be suspected, they impart excellent water resistance.
Acrylonitrile-butadiene latexes impart excellent chemical and water resistance
as well as enhance the other properties described above. Neoprene or
chloroprene latexes impart excellent water resistance and fairly good chemical
resistance; improve mechanical properties, thickening, etc.
- Poly(vinyl
acetate)-based latexes are mainly used for improving drying, dispersing and
thickening. They have poor water sensitivity, ultraviolet radiation resistance
and chemical resistance.
SLIP AID
See Waxes, Surface Modifier, Abrasion
Resistance
A compound that migrates to the surface of a coating during, and
immediately after, application and curing. The compound coats the surface and
provides the necessary lubricity to lower the coefficient of friction and
improve slip characteristics.
Slip represents the ability of two surfaces to glide over each other without
causing any mechanical damage. Many slip aids also function as anti-mar agents
and abrasion-resistant agents.
Nature supplied a model for us to use in protective situations. There is a
wax-like water-repellent film on leaves and blossoms; many animals, like ducks,
are provided with water-repellent coats. We learned from nature that waxes can
provide a protective thin film and that they can offer excellent slip and
surface feel. There are many such additives available to the formulator today.
Slip aids are available as solids or liquids. Solid additives are
conventionally used in dry, dispersed and emulsion form.
Many of the liquid slip additives are silicone based; the solid slip additives
tend to be waxes. The term “wax” does not actually describe a class of chemical
substances. It is a collective term for all materials that display the typical
“wax properties.” A distinction is made between natural waxes (beeswax and
carnauba wax), fossil waxes (montan waxes, paraffins) and fully synthetic waxes
(polyolefins). Carnauba wax (naturally occurring) is made from the leaves of
Brazilian palm trees and is used as a polish for automobiles and floors. Waxes
are chiefly esters in which both the acid portion and the alcohol portion have
very long chains. The following are commonly used: paraffin waxes (alkanes with
25-50 carbons), microcrystalline waxes, polyethylenes, polypropylenes,
fluoropolymers and polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE, commonly called
Teflon™).
Using a combination of PTFE and polyethylene provides good properties to
high-gloss applications as the PTFE imparts good slip, scuff and antiblocking
properties. For low-gloss coatings either polyethylene or polypropylene can be
used by themselves or with silicas. Silicas are used as flatting agents but in
combination with polyethylene or propylene the mar resistance is improved and a
smoother feel is achieved. Small amounts of these waxes also aid in sanding
sealers. These materials also assist as anti-settling agents for the
silicas.
As a general rule, wax emulsions are added last in the coating formulation,
although in each formula this should always be tested and not assumed because
order of addition is always important in a formulation. Normally, levels of
3-5% wax solids on a vehicle solids basis are used in
coatings.
Modified names are used for other substances that have waxy properties.
Paraffin wax is really a mixture of long-chain hydrocarbons. It is one of the
higher-molecular-weight petroleum distillates having 25-50 carbons; as such
they are quite soluble in non-polar hydrocarbon solvents. The paraffin waxes
are often used in solventborne wood coatings and stains.
Polyethylene waxes are unsaturated (containing carbon-carbon double bonds);
this is unlike the paraffin waxes, which have no double bonds (saturated).
Polyethylene waxes are high molecular weight – generally between 1000 and 3000.
These waxes are frequently used as anti-slip aids and mar aids because of their
general insolubility. The polyethylene waxes can be used for most applications
in both water- and solventborne systems. They are available as dispersions and
emulsions in micronized or un-ground forms. The micronized have very fine
particle size and can easily be incorporated into the coating and applied by
means of a spray gun.
During baking conditions, if the bake is higher than the melting point of the
wax, the wax will melt, migrate to the surface and recrystallize as the coating
cools to form a continuous film. In some cases this is desirable. The wax will
bloom to the surface and form a thin layer that can help provide resistance
properties. Sometimes there is a partial migration of the wax to the surface.
Localized wax coverage results.
If having a layer of wax on the surface of the film is not desirable, then the
baking temperatures should be kept below the melting point of the wax.
Combinations of PTFE (polytetrafluoroethylene, or Teflon) and polyethylene are
also used for high-gloss applications.
Choice of particle size depends on the property desired in the coating. The
particle size of the wax should be slightly larger than the film thickness of
the dried coating to maximize abrasion resistance, block resistance and
coefficient of friction reduction. Usually waxes are available in ranges of
sizes and sometimes the same results can be obtained from smaller particle
sizes at higher concentrations. Some waxes of large particle size and type can
act as physical spacers that inhibit another surface from contacting the
coating. (This is also dependent on concentration.)
Waxes decrease blocking so that unwanted transfer or adhesion to a contacted
surface is prevented. This can be very important for materials that are coated,
dried, and stacked for storage and shipping. Waxes can be used in any type of
coating that could benefit from mar resistance and/or a slip aid. Both water-
and solventborne metal coatings benefit from added lubricity and abrasion
resistance.
Micronized waxes are available in a variety of grades and can be added using
high-speed mixing equipment or, for larger particle size waxes, by
pre-dispersing. Some companies provide micronized waxes in liquid form, which
are designed for ease of dispersion in aqueous systems.
Many waxes are modified for uses in water-reducible systems and waterborne
systems. Micronized waxes are added to powder coatings to impart better flow
and a smooth surface on curing. Harder waxes improve hardness and the scratch
resistance of the coating film. For fingernail mar and heat resistance, the
PTFE waxes perform best.
Many types of wax emulsions are available for waterborne systems, including the
following:
1. Carnauba and Carnauba-blend emulsions: These are available as both anionic
and nonionic emulsions and offer additional slip, mar and block
resistance.
2. Microcrystalline and microcrystalline-blend emulsions: These are
petroleum-based emulsions and can be used when low-temperature block resistance
is desired.
3. Polyethylene and copolymer waxes: Polyethylene waxes are synthetic, provide
a variety of melting points and hardness and are desirable for high-temperature
conditions.
4. Paraffin and paraffin-blend emulsions: These are straight-chain hydrocarbons
derived from petroleum oil and are
desired for their ability to repel water.
5. Polyolefin emulsions are used where slip and hardness are
desired.
6. Ethylene acrylic acid (EAA) dispersions are heat sealable at low
temperatures and offer water and solvent resistance.
A study with microcrystalline waxes demonstrated that the harder the wax, the
better the slip properties. This can be explained by the fact that a softer wax
would tend to be more easily liquefied, and as a consequence, there remains
less of it in a solid state to impart slip. In other words, the harder wax
would have a relatively higher proportion of crystals in the solid state to
impart slip.
Specialty waxes are also available. There is a wax for UV coatings that, in
contrast to conventional wax types, can be firmly anchored in the paint film
through radiation energy. This is due to the modification of the wax with
recently introduced reactive double bonds. These lead to additional bonds
between wax and other substances in the coating during curing. The result is a
two- or three-dimensional crosslinkage, which fixes the wax in the paint and
prevents migration to the surface. These systems provide extraordinary solvent
resistance, and lasting matting through the anchoring of the wax in the
coating.
The silicone additives are available for both solvent and aqueous systems.
Frictional forces must be overcome to allow an object to slide across a coating
surface. Possibilities for reducing the frictional force include reduction of
surface roughness of the film, application of a thin lubricant film on the coating
surface, through which the uneven voids are filled and the sliding body is kept
at a distance. Additives based on modified siloxane can produce both effects.
Through a positive influence on flow and leveling, the surface of the film is
smoother. During drying, the additives become increasingly concentrated at the
surface. A closed film is formed, facilitating dynamic lubrication when a solid
body slides over the surface.
Slip additives are especially effective in solventborne systems. The additives
are quickly carried to the air interface during the drying process, in which a
lubricating film is formed. In solvent-free systems, the additive is insoluble
during the crosslinking process and is pushed to the surface. This mechanism is
particularly effective in the case of UV-curing systems. In waterborne systems,
the effectiveness of the slip additive depends strongly on the resin. In
crosslinking a resin, less additive is required than in physically drying
systems to achieve good slip properties. In addition, in waterborne systems the
effectiveness of slip additives can be influenced by the selection of an
emulsifier.
A customary test method for measuring dynamic (gliding) friction is the
“Horizontal Pull Test”. It is accurate in testing crosslinking systems. It
involves a sled that is made to move by means of an electric motor. In this
development work, this test has been modified, using a felt-backed 500-g
weight. The force, which is necessary to pull the weight over the surface, is
measured. Better slip is measured as a lower force value. This method is quite
accurate and reproducible in differentiating slip values. The best lubricants
are silicones and modified siloxanes with a high polydimethylsiloxane segment
content because of the low interaction of these segments.
Scratches are the result of surface deformation by a sharp object, damaging the
coating surface irreversibly or even penetrating into the coating film.
Increasing the smoothness of the surface with slip additives can make a film
more scratch resistant. A slip additive on the surface of the film provides
hydrodynamic lubrication between sharp objects and the coating surface and so
protects against damage.
In general, silicone fluids exhibit the following properties: low surface
tension, water repellant behavior, thermal resistance, floating inhibition,
flow improvement, and improve gloss and surface smoothness. In addition, they
have an almost unchanged viscosity over a range of temperatures. Care must be
taken in formulation to avoid instability problems.
Some reactive silicones can be incorporated into the system to enhance gloss,
adhesion and mar resistance. These types of products are di-functional silicone
polymers with both ends of each silicone chain-modified with an organic
functional group capable of undergoing further reactions. For example, various
polyalkyleneoxide-modified silicones allow the modified thickener to be lower
in surface tension and hydrophilic.
Manufacturing the end piece of an aluminum two-piece can is an example of a
coating application that puts severe stress on the coating and demands
flexibility and surface lubricity. The end piece in these cans is formed after
the coating is applied. The baked coating has a wax component that will bloom
to the surface during the curing cycle. Usually a layer of wax is then sprayed
over the cured coating prior to re-rolling the stock. Aluminum discs are
punched from the precoated flat stock, shaped into ends and a tab attached.
There is tremendous stress on the coating in this process as the metal is
elongated and the wax must protect the coating from abrasion. Generally
carnauba and paraffin waxes are used in these applications.
Coil coating applications need to be resistant to blocking and abrasion. After
coil stock is coated it is rewound for storage and handling. Wax in the coating
reduces or eliminates marring and blocking. Post formation of the coil involves
stamping, bending and handling, and wax in the coating also helps here. If the
coil is to be recoated, a wax is selected that does not contribute to poor
intercoat adhesion. Many grades of polyethylene satisfy this
condition.
PTFE is used in the topcoat layer for marine application on wood, fiberglass
and metal hulls of ships. Fluorinated polyurethane coatings containing
micronized PTFE are effective antifouling coatings.
In summary, slip agents are available as solids or liquids. The liquid slip
aids are usually either polydimethylsiloxane – either diluted with solvent, or
in the form of an emulsion for use in waterborne systems. These silicones will
migrate to the surface of the coating and impart excellent slip resistance and
lubricity. If not properly used, they can also be the source of surface defects
such as cratering. Loss of adhesion is also possible if other interfaces are
affected.
Slip-resistant or anti-skid additives are compounds that function directly
opposite of slip additives or lubricants. They make it more difficult to move
one surface past another surface. Compounds such as the colloidal silicas are
used for this purpose. In the marine coating segment, antislip or antiskid
coatings are those that reduce the sliding and slipping of humans and cargo on
decks.
SOIL REPELLANTS
A chemical agent that improves a coating’s ability to resist soiling by
foreign materials, other than microorganisms, deposited on or imbedded in the
dried film.
SPREADING AGENT
A chemical that either reduces the surface tension of a liquid coating
to enhance flow, reduces the viscosity or resistance to spreading, or aids in
the wetting of the substrate.
STAIN-RESISTANT ADDITIVE
A chemical agent that improves a coating’s ability to resist defacement
by foreign materials, other than microorganisms, deposited on the surface of
the film.
STATIC PREVENTIVE
See Anti-Stat Agent
SUBSTRATE WETTING AGENTS
See Wetting Agent
SURFACE-ACTIVE AGENTS
See Surfactants
Surface-active agents are compounds that when added to a liquid alter
its properties when it comes in contact with another liquid, solid or gas.
These additives alter the interfacial characteristics of the liquid. Surface-control
additives are multifunctional, improve leveling, slip and scratch resistance,
and prevent craters, orange peel, fish eyes, pin holes and pigment flotation.
SURFACE ADDITIVES/DEFECTS
Additives are often used to prevent surface defects that can mar the
appearance of the coating and/or the protective properties of the coating. Some
of the more common surface defects that appear at the coating-air interface
are: orange peel, craters, fisheyes, picture framing and popping. Surface
defects that occur at the substrate-coating interface are: crawling or cissing
(poor wetting), and telegraphing.
There are additives, which have been discussed in other sections of this
handbook, that are typically used to prevent and/or eliminate the above
mentioned defects. These additives typically fall into the following types of
categories: solvents, silicones (polysiloxanes), polyacrylates,
fluorosurfactants and a variety of other chemical types.
SURFACE MODIFIER
See Surfactants, Surface-Active Agents,
Slip-Aid, Waxes
A surface modifier is an additive intended to modify a particular
surface property. Typical functions of surface modifiers are
to:
- reduce the effect of
friction/surface tension of the film;
- improve abrasion
resistance;
- alter a coating’s
“feel”;
- modify surface
appearance; and
- enhance other
performance properties.
For example, an easily cleaned surface is an important target of new developments
in architectural coatings and general industrial coatings (such as household
appliances), wood coatings (kitchen and bathroom cabinets), plastic coatings
(coatings for consumer electronics), marine coatings and so forth. Fluorinated
resins are well known for superior durability and for excellent dirt-releasing
properties. A specialty application coating in the architectural market
utilizes a very hydrophilic surface that is easily cleaned by rain. This easy
surface cleaning property, or cleanability, is typically a function of the
specific binders selected to form the film. However, good cleanability can also
be obtained with conventional binders when they are modified with certain
additives. Among those additives, crosslinkable silicone containing polymers
provide a unique set of properties.
Silicone additives are well known for their beneficial effects in coatings.
Polyether- or polyester-modified silicones not only provide good surface flow
and substrate wetting, but also improvement of surface slip and mar resistance.
However, the improvement of surface slip and mar resistance is limited because
the silicone on the coating surface can be washed or wiped off. Hydroxyl
functional polyester or polyether-modified silicones can provide longer-lasting
surface slip properties, but improvement of surface cleanability is not
completely satisfactory.
A new, special silicone-modified hydroxyl-functional acrylate additive has been
developed to enhance the surface cleaning properties (cleanability) of
coatings. Crosslinkable via the –OH groups, the additive provides long-lasting
significant improvements in cleanability so that adhering dust and dirt
particles as well as graffiti can be removed much easier compared to ‘normal’
surfaces. This new development not only provides easily cleaned surfaces in
hydroxyl-crosslinking binders, but also improves surface flow, substrate
wetting, slip and mar resistance.
Due to the described properties of this new
additive, many interesting coatings with unique surface properties can be
developed for new applications. Potential areas for this new technology are in
the following applications.
- Polyurethane
coatings for buildings, facades and ceramic tiles for tunnels that are graffiti
resistant.
- Polyurethane wood
coatings for kitchen cabinets.
- Baking alkyd-melamine
and polyester-melamine coatings for household appliances.
- Polyurethane coatings
with improved foulant-releasing properties due to the low surface
energy.
- Polyurethane coatings
for consumer electronics with easily cleaned and scratch-resistant
surfaces.
- Interior coatings for
metal drums/pails/other technical metal packaging containers to provide more
complete drainage.
The excellent resistance to graffiti does however severely limit recoat
adhesion. This additive (silicone-modified hydroxyl-functional acrylate) is
only recommended for those applications not needing recoatability. Recoating is
only possible with surface sanding.
Wax-based surface modifiers are used to optimize abrasion resistance, raise or
lower coefficient of friction, or improve chemical resistance. For a wax to
perform, the material must migrate to the surface and sometimes protrude out of
the coating. Surface modifiers rely on two mechanisms to
migrate:
(1) Stacking/ball
bearing: this mechanism relies on the wax particle either being similar in size
to the coating thickness, or several particles stacking and
bridging.
(2) Bloom/floating: in
coating systems where heat is applied, the wax particles become molten or
solubilize and migrate to the surface due to incompatibility or lower specific
gravity. The wax may form a thin layer on the surface. If the density of the
wax is significantly lower than that of the coating, the particles may float to
the surface during the curing.
Other variables that effect migration are raw material interaction, coating
viscosity/specific gravity, curing conditions, additive chemistry and additive
form.
Waxes can be divided into synthetic (produced by polymerization), refined (from
fossil fuels) and natural.
Polyethylene (PE) waxes are produced by the polymerization of ethylene. PE
waxes have a broad range of physical characteristics, providing a wide variety
of performance possibilities in coatings. Melting points of PE waxes are
between 100 ˚C and 130 ˚C. The features and benefits of PE waxes include good
slip and matting properties; improved scratch, and mar and abrasion
resistance.
Polypropylene (PP) waxes are produced by polymerization of propylene. They have
a higher melting point than most waxes. They are often blended with PE waxes to
use their properties of high elasticity and toughness. The benefits include
improved scratch resistance, very good antiblocking properties, excellent
abrasion resistance and good migration characteristics. Their disadvantages are
cost and poor slip qualities.
Mono and bis-amide waxes are semi-synthetic waxes have higher melting points
and low penetration hardness and are relatively brittle. The benefits include
good matting, excellent sanding, enhancement of silky and soft feel, thickening
of liquids, antisettling properties and good migration characteristics. Their
disadvantages are reduced gloss, thickening of solventborne paints and they may
cause yellowing in light-colored thermoset coatings.
Carnauba wax, an ester of long-chain alcohols and acids, is extracted from the
leaves of the carnauba palm tree. It melts below 100 ˚C and the benefits
include excellent slip and good mar resistance, hardness, excellent clarity and
it is FDA-compliant. Disadvantages include cost/availability due to crop
variation and the color may prohibit use in some applications.
PTFE is not a wax because it does not dissolve or melt at the temperatures used
in coatings, however it functions like one. PTFE produces a very low
coefficient of friction in coatings and inks, and is usually used in blends
with PE. The benefits include excellent slip; promotes antiblocking; improves
stability against polishing; and improves abrasion, scratch, mar and scuff
resistance. Its disadvantage is its high cost and it may cause intercoat
adhesion problems at high levels.
Waxes are available as powders, cold dispersions, and emulsions or
precipitations. Particle size of waxes is very important.
SURFACE TENSION REDUCER
Any chemical agent that, when added to a mixture, reduces the property
known as surface tension.
SURFACTANTS
Surfactants encompass a variety of compounds that are used in various
ways. The term ‘surfactant’ is derived from ‘surface-active agents,’ and as the
name implies, the compounds are used to alter surface phenomena. These
chemicals will reduce surface tension and improve wetting and spreading
(wetting agents); aid in dispersion of pigments in formulated products
(dispersants); inhibit foam formation (defoamers) although others will
stabilize foams; and cause or improve emulsion formation (emulsifiers). These
topics will be treated individually, but in each case keep in mind that we are
really talking about compounds that affect surface activity –
surfactants.
There is widespread use of surfactants in waterborne coatings where surfactants
play a crucial role, and yet the same compounds can cause problems in the final
film that is laid down. In the chemical industry, surfactants have been used
for many decades to: emulsify oil and water systems; as wetting agents; for
dispersion of solids in liquids; as defoamers; and as foam stabilizers in the
polyurethane industry.
At times it is difficult to categorize, define or associate particular
surfactants in an end-use sense, because the same surfactant can be used as a
dispersant in one application and as an emulsifier in another application.
Thus, the roles of some of these materials can overlap and complement each
other. The quantity of surfactant used can also play an important part in how
the compound functions. Sometimes too much of a ‘good thing’ can turn it into
an ‘undesirable thing.’ For this reason, it is important to discuss surfactant
usage with suppliers.
Surfactants are chemical compounds that have a hydrophilic or ‘water-loving’ portion
and another portion that is hydrophobic or ‘water-hating’ in nature. Often the
molecules are oligomeric in nature. This is particularly true in the case of
nonionic surfactants. Usually the hydrophobic portion of the molecule is
comprised of long-chain hydrocarbons such as fatty acids; straight, branched or
cyclic hydrocarbons; or aromatic hydrocarbons with or without alkyl side
groups. The hydrophilic portion of the molecule will contain groups that
attract or are attracted to water molecules. Groups such as hydroxyl, carboxyl,
sulfonate, sulfate and the like will be found in the hydrophilic portion of the
molecule. In other cases, the hydrophilic portion will be an ethylene oxide
chain that is relatively short – it is well known that each oxyethylene group
will strongly associate and complex with two or three molecules of water, which
markedly changes their nature. In addition, other water molecules will less
strongly associate with the water/oxyethylene complex that is formed.
Oxyethylene/oxypropylene copolymers are surface active and used in specialty
areas.
Surfactants preferentially concentrate at
interfaces. These interface surfaces or interfacial regions are where one
continuous phase ends and another begins. By their chemical nature, surfactants
lower the total energy associated with the boundary and stabilize it. For
example, consider a container with oil and water. The boundary layer between
the two substances will be well defined, and there is a large energy involved
in keeping the boundary layer stationary. If the system is shaken, the oil will
disperse into the water because energy is being supplied by shaking, and this
overcomes the energy holding the boundary in place. However, if allowed to
stand under room conditions, the system soon returns to its original condition
with a single boundary dividing the substances. If we add surfactant to the
system, the oil is broken into droplets and dispersed. However, the process has
created a large number of tiny drops of oil that are now dispersed in the
water. The system is more or less stable. All of the droplets formed have
surfaces that are now in contact with water. There has been a very large
increase in the interfacial contact area between the two substances. The only
reason this dispersion of oil into droplets can take place and be maintained is
because the energy associated with the large surface has been significantly
reduced.
It should be apparent from this discussion that surfactants can have a
marked affect on the interfacial forces between materials. They modify the
properties of liquid-liquid, liquid-gas and liquid-solid interfaces by changing
the interfacial tension. The usual effect of a surfactant is to decrease the
surface tension of an aqueous system such as a waterborne coating. In such
systems, the surfactant concentrates at the air/liquid interface. Surfactants
vary in their ability to cause defoaming. As mentioned above, excessive use of
surfactants in aqueous coatings can cause the undesirable situation of foam formation
and stabilization.
Although essential in latex preparation, it should be kept in mind that the
hydrophilic portion of the surfactants is immiscible with the polymer matrix,
which is hydrophobic in nature. During film formation, this immiscibility
results in hydrophilic surfactant domains in the film, and these can have an
effect on adhesion, moisture sensitivity and appearance. New surfactants that
are copolymerizable or otherwise non-migratory in nature are being
developed.
In an overall sense, surfactants are classified according to the electronic
charge associated with the molecules. They fall into four categories: nonionic,
anionic, cationic and amphoteric.
1.
Nonionic Surfactants . Nonionic surfactants usually refer to
polyoxyethylene derivatives although other surfactants are included in this
category. They are usually prepared by the addition reaction of ethylene oxide
to hydrophobic compounds that contain one or more active hydrogen atoms.
Examples of such hydrophobic compounds are fatty alcohols, alkyl phenols, fatty
acids, fatty amine, alkanolamines, fatty mercaptans, fatty amines and certain
polyols. The polyols can include oxypropylene polyols, polyesters, and the
like. These surfactants do not carry a charge nor do they dissociate. Their
surface-active character comes from the oxyethylene portion of the molecule.
Both the nature of the hydrophobe and the length of the oxyethylene chain have
an effect on the surface-active character.
Nonionic surfactants are the most common ones used in latex coatings. In such
systems, these surfactants do not ionize. Instead, they hydrate in water
through association complex formation and hydrogen bonding at the ether-oxygen
sites as well as interaction with the hydroxyl groups that usually, but not
necessarily, are found at the end of the molecule. Overall, these groups are
weakly hydrophilic in comparison to the hydrophobic portion of the molecule.
Also present in many nonionic surfactants are weak ester and amide linkages.
Because of this difference, or needed balance between hydrophilic and
hydrophobic nature, the oxyethylene portion of the molecule is much larger than
the hydrophobic portion in a molecular weight sense.
A particular advantage of the nonionic surfactants is that they are compatible
with ionic surfactants. For example, many nonionic surfactants function well
with anionic surfactants. In such combinations, they impart good freeze-thaw
stability to aqueous systems and are less deleterious to mechanical properties
than the ionic compounds. Nonylphenol ethoxylate (NPE) is a typical example of
such surfactants. Other examples are: octylphenol ethoxylates (OPE), secondary
alcohol ethoxylates, trimethyl nonanol ethoxylates (TMN), specialty alkoxylates,
and amine ethoxylates.
Nonionic surfactants generally perform well over a range of pH values, and they
will usually foam less than anionic and cationic surfactants. However, nonionic
surfactants may not lower the surface tension as well as anionic or cationic
surfactants in complex coating formulations.
There are non-ionic polymeric fluorochemical surfactants that provide low
surface tensions in organic coating systems. The lower the surface tension, the
more effectively a coating wets, levels and spreads. Consequently, these are
excellent wetting, leveling and flow-control agents for a variety of
waterborne, solventborne and high-solids coatings systems. This is particularly
important on surfaces that are not clean, as contamination, surface defects and
hard-to-wet surfaces can cause orange peel, cratering, fish eyes and picture
framing.
When a surfactant is added to a coating, it concentrates at the interface
between the liquid and the substrate. That is because surfactant molecules are
made up of two groups: a soluble group and an insoluble group. The insoluble
end tends to push out of the liquid and the soluble end tends to be pulled in.
These combined actions lower the surface energy of a liquid and allow it to
better wet, level and flow over a surface.
Most of the fluorosurfactants are soluble and compatible with most polymers and
continue to be active throughout the drying or curing process. When used in
waterborne systems, they tend to reduce the aqueous/organic interfacial tension
and remain surface active in the organic portion of the polymer
system.
2.
Anionic Surfactants . These surfactants carry a negative charge on the
hydrophilic portion of the molecule. They are usually phosphates, sulfates and
sulfonates. Anionic surfactants are good emulsifying and wetting agents, but
they do not impart good mechanical properties or freeze-thaw stability. These
surfactants may or may not contain an oxyethylene chain in their structure.
Examples of anionic surfactants are sulfosuccinates, dioctyl sulfosuccinate
(DOSS), polyether sulfates, polyether sulfonates, polyether phosphates, sodium
lauryl sulfate and phosphate ester-modified alcohol-ethoxylates. Generally
speaking, anionic surfactants perform best in alkaline coating
systems.
Surface-active phosphate esters are a class of anionic surfactants prepared by
the reaction of alcohols with an activated phosphoric acid derivative –
including phosphoric acid anhydrides and acid chlorides. Typically, phosphate ester
commercial products are composed of a mixture of monoester, diester,
free-phosphoric acid and free alcohol used in its preparation. The property of
the final phosphate ester product is primarily defined by the starting alcohol
used as well as on the composition of the four different species. Conversely,
the property of the final phosphate product can be tailor-made by altering the
alcohol used in the preparation as well as controlling the ratio of the four
different components present in the final product. Phosphate ester surfactants
are made in the free-acid form, but can also be neutralized to the salt form
using any base including sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, ammonium
hydroxide or any organic amine.
As a result of the surface activity provided by combining the alcohol used
(hydrophobic component) and the anionic phosphate moiety (hydrophilic
component), these products are widely used in a number of industries because of
their wetting, dispersing and emulsifying properties – as wetting and
dispersing agent, emulsifier, hydrotrope or stabilizer. In addition, the
presence of the phosphate moiety imparts some complex interactions with
metallic surfaces, thereby exhibiting anti-corrosive and metal adhesion
properties. Phosphate ester surfactants have also been found to successfully
stabilize reactive pigments such as iron oxide and zinc oxide. The phosphate
ester moiety does not easily hydrolyze upon exposure to extreme pH conditions –
phosphate ester surfactant will be present in the application when
needed.
General applications of phosphate ester surfactants rely on its surface
activity. Initially, phosphate esters were designed for application as
cleaners, detergents and scouring agents in textile processing. Over the last
50 years, they have also found wide utility in other industries including
emulsion polymerization, agriculture and metal working as wetting and
dispersing agents, hydrotropes, emulsifiers, and
stabilizers.
For coating applications – including water- and solventborne coatings and ink
applications – it has been determined that the introduction of the phosphate
moiety into the formulation as a wetting and dispersing agent also
significantly enhances the gloss and color acceptance properties, reduces the
viscosity buildup of the paint with aging, inhibits rust corrosion (flash
rusting as well as long-term corrosion resistance), promotes adhesion to metal
surfaces, and provides films that exhibit lower water sensitivity (as compared
to coatings with conventional surfactant additives). These phosphate esters are
typically used as auxiliary dispersants to result in more stable, more
homogeneous dispersions. In addition, supplementing certain phosphate esters to
low-VOC formulations to replace glycols and other volatile reagents in
waterborne formulations result, in most instances, in improved block
resistance, open time and freeze-thaw stability.
Typically, the phosphate ester surfactants are added into the formulation
during paint manufacture – added either in the grind or letdown depending upon
the formulation. These additives have also been tested as post-paint
formulation additives and have exhibited comparable properties. It has been
speculated, and is the focus of a number of investigations, that use of the
phosphate ester surfactant before the paint formulation stage – use of
phosphate esters in emulsion polymerization as well as post polymerization
stabilizer or additive in pigment dispersion – should only benefit the final
property of the paint as well as reduce the detrimental effects of additional
surfactants into the paint system.
3.
Cationic Surfactants. These surfactants carry a positive charge. As a
rule, cationic surfactants do not play a significant role in emulsion
polymerization. Compounds such as alkyl trimethyl ammonium chloride typify
these surfactants. Generally speaking, cationic surfactants perform best in
acidic coating systems.
4. Amphoteric Surfactants.
Amphoteric surfactants exhibit both positive and negative character. An example
of these compounds is lauryl betaine. Amphoteric compounds have been developed
for the prevention of flocculation of carbon black and other pigments in high
solids systems. They have also been used to prevent viscosity increases where
polymer solubility is causing rheology problems.
Contribution to Properties
Surfactants comprise a very minor portion of a system, if the quantity
used is based on the total weight of the system. However, even though they are
used in small quantities, surfactants make a major contribution to the
following properties.
- Pigment Wetting and
Dispersing: Anionic surfactants are the major type used to improve wetting and
dispersion of pigments. They are essential for good dispersion, which allows
one to optimize hiding power as well as flow and leveling. Both anionic
dispersants and nonionic wetting agents contribute to overcome pigment floating
and settling. Each pigment particle requires a particular amount to disperse
and stabilize it. Excessive amounts of surfactant should not be used because
this can lead to color and other appearance changes and moisture and/or water
sensitivity with an accompanying loss of adhesion and poor scrub resistance.
Pigment wetting involves the replacement of the pigment/air interface with a
pigment/liquid interface. This replacement is accomplished by dispersing the
pigment in the liquid by mechanical means, which is something that can be done
with a high-speed disperser. When a surfactant is present in the mixture, the
hydrophobic portion interacts with the pigment particles and the hydrophilic
portion with the liquid – often water. Here the surfactant becomes the
dispersant by keeping the pigment particles separated, which prevents
agglomeration and settling during storage. This is accomplished by one or both
of two mechanisms (a) electrostatic repulsion and/or (b) steric
hindrance.
Steric hindrance takes place when the hydrophobic portion of a nonionic surfactant
is absorbed onto the surface of the pigment particles. The long hydrophilic
chain is in the liquid medium, and it acts as a bumper that prevents the
stabilized pigment particles from too closely approaching each other. This is
the mechanism by which nonionic surfactants function.
When the hydrophilic portion of the surfactant is adsorbed on the pigment
particles, the ionic portion of the molecule or hydrophile will be found in the
liquid phase. This charged portion of the molecule will repel particles that
contain like electrostatic charges on other particles with the result a
stabilized system. Anionic surfactants function by this
mechanism.
- Color
Development: This property is achieved or optimized by the
proper or correct dispersion of the pigment particles in a coating formulation.
The more finely divided the insoluble pigment is in the paint, the more uniform
and better (true) will be color development. Color development is a direct
result of the efficiency or effectiveness of the pigment dispersion, a factor
that is dependent on the type of surfactant used for dispersion. Since the
surface character of pigments can be quite different in nature, there is no one
surfactant what will be universal for all pigments. It is important that
formulators read and use supplier information as well as call on them for
assistance. Other factors that play a role in color development are the nature
of the latex used, type of thickener used, type and level of defoamer, and type
of preservative used.
- Washability and
Cleansability: As mentioned earlier, nonionic surfactants and other surfactants that
contain an oxyethylene segment will have an effect on moisture sensitivity.
Nonionic surfactants usually are less severe in causing moisture sensitivity as
compared to ionic surfactants. Proper selection of the nonionic used is
important to obtaining the best adhesion and scrubbability. New non-migrating
surfactants may be very useful in improving these properties.
- Foam: When
foam forms, changing the surfactant or surfactant blend being used can modify
the foaming characteristics of the paint being prepared. Low-molecular-weight
nonionic surfactants will foam less than high-molecular-weight nonionic
surfactants. In general, all nonionic surfactants will cause less foam than
anionic surfactants.
While fluorosurfactants are perceived by
many as foam generators, certain types of fluorosurfactants act as defoamers in
coatings when used at low levels. The grades recommended for most architectural
paint applications decrease foam when the formulation also minimizes the use of
other foam-causing surfactants. In most cases when fluorosurfactants are used
other defoaming agent usage can be decreased or eliminated.
- Freeze-Thaw Stability: Ethylene
and/or propylene glycol are usually added to paints to obtain freeze-thaw
stability. A mixture of nonionic and anionic surfactants properly blended will
yield a synergistic balance between the respective properties of the individual
surfactants. Properly blended combinations of these surfactants will often
provide excellent freeze-thaw stability and allow decreased levels of ethylene
or propylene glycol to be used.
- Volatile Organic Content
(VOC): Usually surfactants are not a contributor to VOC. However, some
surfactants are dissolved in or contain organic solvents. An example of such
surfactants is those that have been used to achieve specific colorant
stability. Thus, the contained organic solvent must be taken into account when
calculating VOC. If one wishes to obtain zero VOC or to decrease VOC, such
surfactants might or must be eliminated from formulations. Correct use of
surfactants can help decrease the level of glycol, coalescents and other VOC
contributors in a formulation.
- Package or Storage Stability:
Surfactants play an important role in obtaining good coating stability and good
in-can or storage stability in particular. They are useful in reducing
settling.
- MFFT and Tg:
Both of these properties can be significantly affected by the choice of
surfactant; some families of surfactants can substantially lower MFFT by 10 -
20 ˚C and Tg by 5 - 10 ˚C for certain formulations. This is due to the unique
chemistry of the surfactants and this provides great formulation latitude with
benefits such as improved adhesion, lower coating temperatures, and reduced
VOCs.
- Surface
Tension Reduction: With today’s diversified coating substrates and
waterborne low-VOC coating systems, surface tension reduction is essential for
application and good film formation. High surface tension will cause paint film
defects such as craters, fish eyes, pin holes, orange peel and poor thin film
control. Telomer-based fluorosurfactants are very powerful at very low
concentration in reducing surface tension. This allows the use of very small
amounts and still achieves wetting and leveling, with reduced foam to achieve
defect free coatings on conventional and hard-to-wet surfaces, such as plastics.
- Emulsion Stabilizer:
Fluorosurfactants work synergistically with hydrocarbon surfactants in resin
synthesis during emulsion polymerization. Their main functions are stabilizing
the emulsion, controlling particle size and allowing the reduction of
hydrocarbon emulsifier surfactants. Reducing hydrocarbon surfactants can also
help reduce foaming in the paint formulation. After the polymerization,
fluorosurfactants are carried over to the final coating formulation to provide
the other properties provided by fluorosurfactants.
- Open-time
Extension: Open-time is the time that it takes the surface
of the wet paint to form a partially dry top layer. Short open time causes
coating defects in the over- and cross-painted areas. With low-VOC paint
formulations, open time is normally reduced due to lack of slower-evaporating
solvents; this causes over-brush defects. Open-time of a latex paint is
influenced by the viscosity, rheology, surface leveling and water evaporation
rate under a given relative humidity when the paint is applied. Selective
fluorosurfactants have demonstrated a positive impact on leveling and slow down
water evaporation from the wet film surface, thus reducing the surface defects
caused with short open-time for latex paints.
- Dirt Pickup-Resistance (DPR): Dirt
pickup for low-VOC exterior paint is one of toughest challenges that
formulators encounter. Many factors contribute to increased dirt pickup.
High-PVC paints have higher surface area allowing a greater area for dirt to
accumulate; low Tg resins make the film soft and sticky under heat and
moisture; and oil-affinitive surface-active additives attract environmental
dirt and stains to the painted surface. There are two approaches that are currently
taken by the industry to increase exterior DPR.
One approach is to make the paint surface highly hydrophobic, measured by high
water contact angle. This approach often uses a silicone-modified resin or
silicone additives in the formulation. The challenge with this approach is that
if the paint does not have high enough water repellency, which has a water
contact angle above 130-145°, dirt stains will appear as dark streaks on the
wall that are not removed by
rain.
A second approach is to make the paint surface hydrophilic, so it will allow
rain to rinse the surface. If this surface is also static dissipative it will
repel airborne particles from the painted surface. Fluorosurfactants work well
with the second approach. Fluorosurfactants serve three functions: allow the
reduction of other oil attracting additives; allow the reduction of hydrophobic
additives; and add oil repellency to the paint. Because fluorosurfactants
migrate to the film surface and enrich the top 25% depth of the paint surface,
the amount needed to achieve oil repellency at the surface is very
low.
Other Surfactants
In addition to the types of surfactants discussed above, there are other
types of surfactants in use. Copolymerizable surfactants offer another approach
for formulators to use when improving set adhesion and stabilization of
coatings. These surfactant monomers are used during latex polymerization and
are incorporated into the polymer that will form the final coating film. These
types of monomer must be able to:
- provide sufficient
surfactant capability to emulsify or otherwise disperse the
monomers;
- be sufficiently
reactive to become a part of the polymer – i.e., able to copolymerize and not
homopolymerize to any extent; and
- be properly
distributed in the growing polymer so their surface-active character can come
into play.
Surfactants need to be both hydrophilic and hydrophobic or lipophilic (oil
loving) in nature. In addition, copolymerizable surfactants must contain
reactive functionality in the region that joins the hydrophilic and hydrophobic
portions of the molecule. This functionality, which is usually ethylenic
unsaturation, is the portion of the molecule that will allow incorporation of the
molecules into the growing polymer chains. These surfactants appear to function
better if the unsaturation is located near the lipophilic end of the
molecule.
The copolymerizable surfactants can be nonionic or anionic in character. Both
types have good surface-active characteristics, and they are available with
reactive moieties located near the hydrophobic end of the molecule. These
monomers can be used as the sole emulsifier in anionic or mixed
anionic/nonionic systems for the preparation of latex products with improved
water sensitivity (decreased) and accompanying properties. They also provide
improved mechanical properties to the coating films.
Fluorinated compounds, silicone oils and modified siloxanes are surface-active
in solventborne systems because of their inherently low surface tension.
Fluoro- or silicone surfactants provide wetting to low-surface-energy
substrates, and they can impart low equilibrium surface tension reducing
capabilities. However, they have poor dynamic performance. The ability to
reduce dynamic surface tension is important during high speed coating
operations wherein the surfactant needs to diffuse to the interface as rapidly
as possible to provide good wetting.
Silicone surfactants are short-chain polydimethylsiloxanes that contain only a
few polyether sections as modifying groups. Organo-modified siloxanes have
distinctly different properties than their original polydimethylsiloxane
counterparts, with respect to silicone crater formation, and other silicone-caused
surface defects. The compounds are derived from low-molecular-weight
polydimethylsiloxanes and rather than having only methyl functionality, various
organic chains replace certain methyl groups to increase the compound’s
compatibility with coatings and inks. The organic portion of the molecule can
be polyether, polyester or a long alkyl chain.
The most important modification is the polyether chemistry derived from
ethylene oxide and/or propylene oxide. Hydrophilic character, i.e., water compatibility,
increases as a function of the ethylene oxide content so that it is even
possible to synthesize water-soluble silicone-based additives. Factors
influencing the properties of modified siloxanes are silicone content, and the
type and location of organic groups on the molecule. Polyether-modified
siloxanes simultaneously influence the following effects in
coatings.
They:
- improve flow and
leveling;
- promote formation of a
uniformly structured surface;
- prevent floating of
pigment and matting agents (Bénard cells);
- reduce coefficient of
friction;
- improve scratch
resistance;
- promote substrate
wetting; and
- prevent
craters.
Fluorochemical surfactants are used in waterborne and high-solids systems.
Because of the strength of the carbon-fluorine bond, these surfactants can be
used effectively in harsh environments such as hot acid or alkali, oxidizing or
reducing agents, acid baths, and so forth. By reducing the surface tension
gradient, coating defects such as cratering, Bénard cells, edge pull, fish eyes
and picture framing can be eliminated. Surface tension gradients can be caused
by uneven solvent evaporation or by uneven heating. These defects are caused by
these factors because the temperature variations they cause result in the
coating having a tendency to flow from the low-surface-energy areas to the
high-surface-energy areas. Fluorochemical surfactants can be tailored to
function in all types of coating systems including solventborne, waterborne,
high-solids and powder coatings.
The multi-functional properties provided by fluorosurfactants include
anti-crater, improved leveling, reduced foaming, decreased block, open-time
extension, oil repellency and dirt pickup-resistance.
Until very recently, fluorosurfactants were used to address formulation
problems near the end of the coating development cycle. Recent research and
practice have demonstrated that fluorosurfactants are most useful and cost
effective due to the multiple functions they provide in formulating a low or
VOC-free architectural coating. The formulator can reduce other ingredients and
create high-performance paints by minimizing the use of other coating
additives, such as defoamers, wetting agents, leveling aids, anti-block
additives and open-time extenders. Oil repellency and other functions that
fluorosurfactants provide have also made them attractive to formulators in
developing dirt pickup-resistance exterior paints.
Formulators often consider using fluorocarbon surfactants as dispersants in
coating formulations. However, fluorocarbon surfactants will not function as
dispersants in a coating formulation because they repel essentially any
materials except for other fluorocarbons. To function effectively, a part of a
dispersant must be attracted to the liquid carrier and a part must be attracted
to the material being dispersed. In such a situation, fluorocarbon surfactants
could be added to the liquid carrier, thereby reducing the surface tension of
the liquid carrier and allowing it to wet the material being
dispersed.
Another type of fluorosurfactant has a new fluoropolymer technology platform
based on oxetane chemistry that features short fluorinated side chains, stable
ether linkages and reactive end group functionality. Unlike conventional,
non-polymeric fluorosurfactants that are typically based on long C8F17
fluoroalkyl groups, those based on oxetane chemistry are short-chain structures
that vary from only CF3 to C4F9.
The macromolecular structure of these surfactants makes them less bio-available
than typical small-molecule fluorosurfactants. As coatings modifiers, these
compounds have proven to perform well despite the moderate surface tension
values (25–30 dynes/cm) they provide. The polymeric structure of the
fluorosurfactants and the modest surface tension offers performance benefits
including improved wetting, flow and leveling, as well as stain- and
scratch-resistance in some applications. They also have been shown to prevent
defects such as cratering, pinholing, fish eye and picture
framing.
In addition to fluoro- and silicone surfactants, the advance acetylenic glycol
(AAG) surfactants have the ability to reduce the combinations of equilibrium
and dynamic surface tension. These phenomena are important to slow- and
high-speed applications, respectively. For waterborne systems, the AAG
surfactants impart low water sensitivity, foaming and VOC in combination with
good flow and leveling as well as enhanced wetting and surface tension
reduction.
Block copolymer nonionic surfactants offer blocks of hydrophilic and
hydrophobic groups. A key advantage for these surfactants is obtained from the
block structure that provides improved steric stability for the separation of
latex particles from each other. This type of surfactant usually displays very
low foam generation and has excellent chemical, mechanical, steric, freeze-thaw
and electrolyte stability.
Typical organic surfactant technology using alkyl phenol ethoxylates is
sometimes inadequate in its wetting ability. These may have a tendency to foam
plus cause water sensitivity problems. In such cases, the block copolymer
alkylene oxide copolymer surfactants offer an alternative approach.
In formulating with surfactants, many people find the Hydrophilic Lipophilic
Balance, HLB, system helpful. This is a numbering system for rating the
relative hydrophilic nature of a surfactant. The system is based on an
arbitrary numerical scale where zero is assigned to a surfactant that is
overwhelmingly hydrophobic and 20 is assigned to a surfactant that is
overwhelmingly hydrophilic. The number assigned to the surfactant represents a
measure of the balance between its hydrophilic and hydrophobic strengths. A
surfactant with an HLB of 10 has an equal balance of oil-loving and
water-loving groups.
Gemini surfactants have two hydrophilic heads or ends that are connected to two
or three hydrophobic tails or ends. This structure difference is in contrast to
conventional surfactants that have a single hydrophilic head or end connected
to a single hydrophobic end or tail. These unique surfactants, which are named
after the twins of Greek mythology, can be used at very low levels because of
their high efficiency. They provide improved solids dispersion, wetting, foam
control and emulsification, as well as decreased wetting times and reduced
surface tension at lower use levels over conventional surfactants. Readily
biodegradable versions of these surfactants are available. Multifunctional
Gemini-type surfactants can help formulators by improving coalescence and
providing excellent substrate wetting and low foam and low-VOC
systems.
The Gemini surfactants are highly efficient in reducing surface tension and
often have very low critical micelle concentrations. This makes them attractive
for the graphic arts industry, and they have been used for decades to improve
the performance of waterborne inks. Because their structure is so unique the
formulator is often able to solve unique problems without introducing other
undesirable side effects. A typical example of a non-ionic Gemini surfactant is
2,4,7,9-tetramethyl-5-decyne-4,7-diol (TMDD).
APE (alkylphenol ethoxylate)-free for waterborne architectural and industrial
coatings are also available in the marketplace. Multifunctional, low-foaming,
solvent-free additives, designed for pigment and substrate wetting, act as
drop-in replacements for APEs or nonylphenol ethoxylates (NPEs). These surfactants
are also suited for adhesives, inks, pigment synthesis and dispersion.
SUSPENSION AGENTS
A material used in a coating to improve or increase the resistance to
pigment settling.
Fumed silica is frequently used as a suspending or anti-settling agent for the
suspension of solids in liquids or liquids in liquids (emulsions). This use can
produce complete suspensions over long periods of time and it also eliminates
hard settling so that material is readily re-dispersed upon stirring or
shaking. Fumed silica in aerosol products maintains the mixture of active
ingredients, solvents and propellants.
Colloidal microcrystalline cellulose (MCC) is used in the food and
pharmaceutical industries to suspend dense particles, provide stable emulsions
and prevent phase separation. Likewise it can be used in waterborne coatings to
improve in-can shelf stability, color capability and sag. MCC forms a
three-dimensional network in waterborne systems when it is full activated by
shear. As a secondary thickener, MCC provides minimum viscosity to waterborne
systems at low use levels making its use particularly attractive for stain
applications.
SYNERGISTS
Synergists are compounds used in radiation-initiated polymerizations.
These compounds have at least one hydrogen atom on a carbon atom that is
located in the alpha position to a nitrogen atom. Synergists are used in
combination with free radical photoinitiators that function by a bimolecular
reaction. The photoinitiator absorbs the radiation and is excited, but it is
unable to initiate polymerization. Instead it abstracts a hydrogen atom from
the synergist making it a very effective free radical for the polymerization of
unsaturated compounds such as acrylates. Synergists are typically tertiary
amines (i.e., triethylamine, dimethylethanolamine), but amides and ureas have
been used.
Formulators are often able to achieve increased cure rates using conventional
free amine synergists such as methyl diethanol amine, dibutyl ethanol amine,
triethyl amine and triethanol amine. These amines react synergistically with
Type 1 hydrogen-abstracting photoinitiators such as benzophenone or isopropyl
thioxanthone (ITX). They enable formulators to overcome oxygen inhibition, which
negatively affects the surface cure of coatings. Conventional amine synergists
may have odor problems, blooming of the amine to the surface and they may be a
source of extractables in cured coatings.
Acrylated amine oligomers present a viable option to conventional amine
synergists. They enable UV-cure formulators to increase the surface cure rate
and overcome oxygen inhibition as the conventional amine synergists, but they
also provide performance and processing benefits that the others do not.
Typically they have lower volatility, odor, film extractables, no blooming, and
improved color (less yellowing) and solvent resistance.
Synergists have been referred to as accelerators or photoactivators.
TACKIFIER
Chemical agent that will extend the period of time in which an adhesive
will remain in the tacky-dry condition after application to an adherend, under
specified conditions of temperature and humidity.
Tackifiers are compounds that are used to enhance materials to adhere to each
other on contact. These compounds provide for bonds that have a measurable
strength when two surfaces, usually termed an adhesive and an adherend, are
brought into contact with minor pressure. They are usually used in adhesives and
in hot melt coatings. In the coatings industry, they are often a part of a
coating that is termed a ‘bond coat’ or a ‘tack coat’ that is placed on a
substrate or essentially nonporous substrate where it acts as a tie between the
substrate and a new coating.
Chemically tackifiers are comprised of natural rosins and their derivatives,
such as abietic acid; polymeric materials, such as ethylene-vinyl acetate
copolymers, styrene-butadiene-styrene block copolymer, styrene-isoprene-styrene
block copolymers; as well as oil and waxes.
TEXTURIZING AGENTS
A number of materials are available to cause a texture pattern in a
cured powder coating. Most of these materials are based on the impedance of
normal flow during cure. As with all coating ingredients, these conventional
additives offer a balance between performing their intended function and
imparting some negative property.
Conventional texturing additives include a number of high-molecular-weight
polymers used to create a pattern in the coating film. Common examples are
acrylics, butyl esters, polyethylene and polypropylene. Cellulose acetate
butyrate is incorporated at low levels to make “hammertone
finishes.”
Specialty polymers such as polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) are also quite
common. PTFE provides texturing when used at very low addition levels of about
0.1% to 0.25%, with the degree of texturing increasing rapidly as the
concentration increases. PTFE is also available in blends with polyethylene,
which provides a product with a less sharp texturizing effect with
concentration. More of the blend can be used and thus reduces weighing errors
when formulating. Such blends also reduce metal marking and allow a broad
variation in texture from fine grades to coarse. Various rheological modifiers
are popular as well.
These conventional additives represent obstacles to smooth flow and therefore
impart texture patterns. High-molecular-weight materials represent
high-viscosity obstacles. They do not flow much before the coating gels and can
remain in almost the same geometric shape throughout the curing cycle.
Materials that do not melt are solid obstacles. They deliver much the same performance
as high-viscosity obstacles i.e. impeded flow. Any material that causes impeded
flow will cause incomplete leveling before gelation, leaving the surface contoured.
For the most part, conventional materials impede the smooth flow of the
coating. The coating must therefore flow around or over these materials. The
geometric shape of conventional texturing compounds changes little with respect
to the particles of coating. The texturing particles may partially melt, but
flow is restricted compared with the bulk of the coating.
A major problem with conventional texturing additives however is poor
uniformity. Poorly dispersed additives affect the uniformity of the pattern.
Certain areas of the coating may have higher pattern density than others. The
vertical profile may also be uneven.
Using texturizing agents can result in three critical equipment issues. The
first, incomplete dispersion, begins in the extruder. The presence of incompatible
conventional texturing materials aggravates the extruder’s already inefficient
dispersion capabilities.
Processing conditions are the second equipment issue as it may be difficult to
set extrusion parameters to standard conditions. Because of the incompatible
nature of conventional texturing additives and the sensitivity of the highly
complex extruder, it becomes necessary to continually change the extruder
settings and this is time consuming.
The third issue is equipment contamination. Since conventional texturing
material passes through the entire line of production machinery, residue traces
will occur throughout the system. Without thorough cleaning of every piece of
equipment after every production run, subsequent batches will be
contaminated.
Conventional texturing materials can deliver texture that is inconsistent
horizontally and vertically. They may also be limited in the variety of texture
finishes they can produce individually. Formulators may need to use several
different texturing additives to achieve the diversity of special effects they
need.
Surfactant texturing uses the difference between the molten surface tension of
the additive and that of the powder coating texture base. During the baking
cycle, surfactant particles distributed throughout the curing film melt and
create areas of low surface tension. The primary difference between a smooth
finish and a texture base is the absence of flow agents. In most cases, flow
and leveling agents are unnecessary in texture coatings as they contradict the
function of a surfactant texturing agent. Flow agents will try to force a
coating to become smooth, while the texturing agent attempts to perform the
opposite function.
THICKENERS
See Rheology Modifiers; Sag Control
Agents
A material used to thicken (increase the viscosity of) a liquid. Thickening
agents provide the proper consistency to coatings, aid in applying an adequate
thickness of coating to a substrate, and prevent pigment settling. Basically,
thickening agents increase the viscosity at moderate shear rates and thereby
increase the coatings resistance to flow during mixing, pouring and
stirring.
Rheology modifiers are often difficult for a formulator to appreciate and work
with conveniently. They are necessary additives to prevent excessive sag and
spatter during the application process, but they cannot add such a significant
viscosity increase to the product such that it affects the package
viscosity.
Rheology control is particularly important in products that are sold to the
do-it-yourself market. It is not uncommon for cans of house paint to stay on
the shelf in small market areas for one or more years. Therefore, it becomes
imperative that the formulation is such that the paint in the can will be free
from pigment settling and will still apply properly.
Emulsion paints usually require the addition of thickeners so that the paint
has the proper application viscosity and so that the pigments and other
particulates do not settle.
Ideally, rheology modifiers would:
- have minimal impact on
the package viscosity of the coating;
- provide anti-sag
control at elevated temperatures; and
- not detract from the
final film properties.
These additives are carefully designed to promote high viscosity at low shear
rates (i.e., in the can for instance) and low viscosity at higher shear rates
(during application). Very small amounts of additive are required to affect the
rheological properties of a coating – generally amounts from 0.1-5% by
weight.
Rheological additives used to be easy to categorize into solvent and waterborne
systems. With technological advances in waterborne additives, these categories
are no longer logical, as many of the thickeners are applicable to both water
and solvent systems.
The literature also is confusing at times as different companies choose to
categorize the organic thickeners in a variety of different ways. For example,
the organic thickeners and rheology modifiers are often referred to (and
sometimes categorized) as follows:
- HEC Hydroxyethylcellulose
- HMHEC Hydrophobically Modified
HEC
- HASE Hydrophobically Modified
Alkali-Soluble Emulsion
- NSAT Nonionic Synthetic
Associative Thickeners
- HEUR Hydrophobically Modified
Ethoxylate Urethane
- HMPE Hydrophobically Modified
Polyether
- PEPO Polyether
Polyol
NSATs and HASEs are divided into two major categories: low-shear effective,
which increase Stormer consistency, and high-shear effective, which increase
ICI viscosity.
High-shear effective types interact more weakly with latexes. For this reason,
a high-shear effective NSAT may not be the best choice to increase ICI
viscosity in high-PVC/low-latex flat paint. It will do the job, but only at
very high levels. A more strongly interacting low-shear effective product may
be the better choice.
In low-PVC/high-latex paints, a low-shear effective product may interact too
strongly to be the primary thickener – it will deliver the KU target at such a
minute concentration that ICI viscosity will be unacceptably low. In this type
of paint, a high-shear effective product will be the better choice for a
primary thickener.
The following major types of thickener additives that are used to control
rheological properties in coatings are discussed in more detail and categorized
as follows.
- Associative
Thickeners
- Non Associative
Thickeners that interact with the water phase
Cellulosics
Acrylics
- Inorganic
Thickeners
Clays
Swelling
Non-swelling
Fumed Silicas
Overbased Calcium Sulfonate
- Organic Thixotropes
(includes cellulosics, acrylics, etc. as well as castor oil
derivatives/polyamides)
Associative Thickeners
Surfactants are typically characterized as: hydrophile – hydrophobe.
Associative thickeners can be characterized as: hydrophobe – hydrophile –
hydrophobe. In other words, a long hydrophilic center with two hydrophobic
ends. One hydrophobic end would be attracted to the resin surface and the other
end plays a role in the thickening mechanism. This other end can associate with
another resin particle or it can associate with another hydrophobic end of
another thickener molecule.
Associative thickeners are polymers that are
based on water-soluble polymers. These can be acrylate polymers, cellulose
ethers or, for the top-quality nonionic products, poly(ethylene glycol). These
are capped with water-insoluble hydrophobic groups such as fatty alcohols, for
example. In aqueous media or in emulsion, these polymers form a network that
increases the viscosity. The water-soluble backbone polymer is dissolved in
water. The hydrophobic caps are adsorbed onto the hydrophobic emulsion polymer
particles, or they form micelles structures with hydrophobes from other
polymers. As each associative thickener polymer contains at least two
hydrophobic caps, the result is a three-dimensional network within the
emulsion. This increases the viscosity. Mainly high- and mid-shear viscosities
are affected. Therefore, it improves anti-spatter and brush drag more than many
other thickeners.
Because the thickener interacts with the polymer surface, consideration
must be made of the particular polymer when choosing the appropriate thickener.
Factors to be evaluated are the following: polymer particle size, polymer
volume solids and polymer surface hydrophobicity.
As the polymer particle size changes, the total surface area can change
dramatically – this becomes very important in terms of the associative
thickener.
Because associative thickeners are surface active, they function by associating
with the surface of the emulsion binder particles. The particle size and size
distribution of the emulsion, as well as the surfactant system, can have major
effects on the efficiency and performance of thickeners. Other wetting agents
can also affect the thickener behavior. Sound experimental design is
appropriate for looking at wetting agent alternatives and levels as well as particle
size and distribution of the emulsion. Sometimes a combination of thickeners
will provide a synergistic effect and increase efficiency.
As a class, the associative thickeners offer excellent scrub resistance and
flow. Diminishment of spattering is a major advantage. They are sensitive to
surfactants.
By association of these hydrophobes with other components of the paint such as
latex particles, pigment particles or other thickener molecules, they impart a
rheology to the paint that is significantly different than the traditional
high-molecular-weight cellulosics.
As shear forces are applied to these materials, there is thought to be a
disruption of the associative bonds causing a temporary decrease in viscosity.
Upon removal of the shear force, the hydrophobes reassociate, causing an
increase in viscosity. Paints containing associative thickeners generally
exhibit higher viscosity at high rates of shear and lower viscosity at low
rates of shear than paints formulated to comparable Stormer viscosity with
cellulosic thickeners.
The primary thickening mechanisms have been described as providing viscosity by
intermolecular association and by association with disperse phase components.
These thickeners have terminal hydrophobic groups that have been drawn into
solution by the water-soluble backbone. The number and type of hydrophobic
groups determine the viscosity of the solution. Under ideal conditions,
coatings containing associative thickeners are highly dispersed and show little
evidence of depletion flocculation. This improves the rheology of the coating
and also may impart improved hiding and gloss. Decreased spatter is also
obtained with the use of associative thickeners.
The features of associative thickeners are: impart flow and leveling; give very
little roller spatter; give better sag resistance; usually give better gloss
than HEC; give higher film build; are cost effective with HEC; are easy to
incorporate (usually liquid); are resistant to enzymes; and provide one-coat
hiding.
The problems with associative thickeners are: pH sensitive; sensitive to
surfactant HLB; sensitive to type of surfactant, and this is dependent on the
total paint formula (anionic, non-ionic, nonyl phenol, octyl phenol are the types
of surfactants commonly used); sensitive to latex particle size; sensitive to
type of coalescent; sensitive to type of glycol; and water sensitivity is
increased.
The water sensitivity is due to the increased use of surfactant necessary to
stabilize the thickener emulsion. Increased water sensitivity causes a decrease
in scrub resistance.
Heat stability is also not very predictable and can present problems if the
formula is not properly tested. The right surfactants and dispersants can help
here, but again the formula needs to be tested.
Associative thickeners are usually supplied as a latex dispersion or a viscous
solution. When using these thickeners, initially it is wise to follow
suppliers’ recommended formulations until one becomes experienced with how the
thickeners function. Associative thickeners and rheology modifiers are often
referred to as ATRMs.
1. Hydrophobically modified acrylic thickeners, often referred to as HASE are
often used. HASE stands for Hydrophobically modified Alkali Swellable
Emulsion.
2. Among the very best thickeners used for rheological purposes are those in
the class known as HEURs – or Hydrophobically modified Ethylene oxide Urethane
Rheology modifiers. Sometimes these are merely referred to as PU thickeners.
These compounds provide excellent high film-build, leveling, reduced spatter
and a non-flocculative thickening mechanism. These types are nonionic and
exhibit poor sag resistance in most instances. Urethane type associative
thickeners network with themselves and the binder and sometimes even with the
pigment.
New technology significantly reduces the viscosity loss upon tinting. These
HEUR, non-ionic-type thickeners deliver excellent flow and leveling, are free
of both solvent and tin for compliance and offer viscosity stability. The
viscosity stability is achieved through a new viscosity-building mechanism.
This technology is designed to have a lower molecular weight than the
high-shear thickener and for tinted paints offers improved resistance to
viscosity loss, improved sag resistance and preservation of excellent
flow.
3. Because of this and some few other deficiencies, the HEURASE type of
thickeners was developed. These alkali-soluble addition terpolymers are
produced by the emulsion polymerization of a carboxyl functional monomer, a
water insoluble monomer, and a hydrophobic-terminated urethane functional
ethoxylate monomer. Different products and characteristics can be achieved by
varying the ratio of the three monomers and the type of hydrophobe, degree of
ethoxylations and so forth. These materials are supplied as aqueous emulsions
of water insoluble polymer. When a base, such as ammonium hydroxide is added,
the polymer swells, becomes soluble and strongly associates with water – hence
its thickening action.
The HEURASE types of thickeners (water-soluble polymers) have relatively long
chains within the polymer. There are also many carboxyl anions scattered along
the polymer backbone, which repel one another. The hydrophobe interaction is
what is responsible for the thickening mechanism in this type of polymer. The
HEURASE family of thickeners can also be blended so that the rheology of the
coating can be fairly unique.
4. Aminoplast Associative Thickeners – There is a new class of associative
thickeners called HEAT – Hydrophobically modified Ethoxylated Aminoplast
Thickener. The aminoplast linkage is done by use of an aminoplast instead of a
diisocyanate. The aminoplast linkage in most cases is more hydrophilic and more
water-soluble than the diurethane groups. The ability to add very high levels
of hydrophobe is a special property of aminoplast chemistry, and it allows the
production of associative thickeners that resist viscosity loss when glycols or
surfactants are added to coating systems, as happens during tinting of paints
with concentrated colorants.
5. HMHEC – The hydrophobically modified cellulosics (HMHEC) are cellulosic
thickeners, which have a hydrophobe modification on some branches – several
long chain alkyl groups have been introduced along the backbone of the
structure. These molecules build viscosity by association of the various
hydrophobic groups. These paints have higher viscosity at high shear rates, and
therefore get better film build and hiding. See the discussion
under Cellulosics.
Non Associative Thickeners That Interact With
the Water Phase
1.
Cellulosic Thickeners (Cellulosics)
Cellulose is a naturally occurring polysaccharide that can form many
water-soluble ethers. The cellulosics are nonionic water-soluble polymers.
Cellulosic ethers have been available for over 30 years, and they continue to
be used as thickeners in nearly all latex paints. Cellulosics are efficient for
aqueous systems because they thicken the water itself.
In the coatings industry, the most commonly used cellulosic thickeners are as
follows:
- Methyl cellulose
(MC);
- Hydroxyethyl
cellulose (HEC);
- Ethyl hydroxyethyl
cellulose (EHEC);
- Hydroxypropyl
cellulose (HPC);
- Hydroxypropyl methyl
cellulose (HPMC); and
- Hydrophobically
modified hydroxyethyl cellulose (HMHEC).
Hydroxyethylcellulose (HEC) is a water-soluble polysaccharide widely used for
thickening many types of flat to semi-gloss architectural latex paints. It is
available in a range of viscosity grades, and paint thickened with HEC exhibits
excellent colorant compatibility and storage stability. Coating properties that
depend on the molecular weight of HEC include: thickening efficiency; flow and
leveling; spatter resistance; film build; and sag resistance. HEC and other
non-associative water-soluble polymers thicken the water phase of paint, and
the viscosity achieved is related to the hydrodynamic volume of the
water-soluble polymer (WSP) and the degree of chain entanglement of these
polymers in solution.
Cellulosic thickeners may be used by themselves or in combinations with other
thickeners to achieve specific rheology characteristics. Cellulose ethers are
produced in a variety of molecular weights and a number of viscosity grades
ranging from the very low molecular weight with a 2% aqueous solution viscosity
of approximately 10 cps to the highest molecular weight grades approaching
100,000 cps.
The low-molecular-weight grades are usually used as protective colloids in
emulsion polymerization of paint latices. The most common grades that are used
as thickeners range from 4,800 to 50,000 cps.
Various degrees of hydroxyl substitution are also available and so it is
important that the formulator be aware of the various options and associated
effects when picking thickeners of this type. It is through the action of
hydrogen bonding that the mixture actually starts to build and gain in
viscosity. The effect is quite powerful.
Most suppliers of cellulose ethers offer
versions that have been surface treated to allow the powder to disperse in the
water before it begins to dissolve or hydrate. Without such treatment, the
outer layer of the particles would immediately begin to hydrate and gel when
added to water, causing large agglomerates to form. These surface-hydrated
agglomerates would be difficult to dissolve. The surface treatment temporarily
insolubilizes the surface and permits complete dispersion of the powder before
dissolution begins. The time between initial wetting of the powder and the
onset of dissolution is referred to as ‘hydration time’.
Hydration time depends primarily on two factors:
1. The temperature of the water . The higher the temperature, the faster the
hydration.
2. pH – Higher pH means accelerated hydration time.
The traditional cellulosics are high-molecular-weight polymers that thicken
primarily by chain entanglement. Under high shear the polymer chains become
oriented, resulting in lower viscosity and exhibiting shear-thinning behavior.
When the shear force is removed the chains, being highly viscoelastic,
immediately recoil causing the viscosity to increase rapidly, resulting in less
than satisfactory leveling.
Application characteristics such as brush-drag, film build and roller spatter
are directly related to the choice of thickener. Also flow properties such as
leveling and sag resistance are also greatly affected by the
thickener.
The hydrophobically modified cellulosics (HMHEC) are cellulosic thickeners,
which have a hydrophobe modification on some branches – several long chain
alkyl groups have been introduced along the backbone of the structure. These
molecules build viscosity by association of the various hydrophobic groups.
These paints have higher viscosity at high shear rates, and therefore get
better film build and hiding.
HMHECs can provide excellent sprayability, sag resistance, flow and leveling,
gloss and good resistance to pigment settling. They allow for a wide range of
application techniques and have no negative impact on the film formation of
small particle size latexes. Good film formation results in good water and
corrosion resistance and good gloss.
This particular type of associative thickener has gained favor with the vinyl
acetate copolymer systems. Performance is quite close to associative
thickeners, but without formulating complexities.
2.
Acrylics
Acrylic emulsion polymers are used as thickeners for some systems.
Water-soluble acrylates are used for this purpose – either the acid or salt
form of the polymer. Care must be taken here because these soluble thickeners
will remain part of the finished film and are always sensitive to
water.
Polyacrylic acids are quite successfully used as thickeners. They have an
advantage because they are emulsions that thicken by adjustment of the pH of
the batch. But because they are pH sensitive, the viscosity of the batch will
be dependent on any changes in pH. Formulators using these as thickeners must
take great care, since they are sensitive to many other formulating additives
in addition to system pH.
When aramid pulp is added to coatings, the degree of reinforcement will depend
on the length of the fibers used and loading level. Viscosity build and sag
resistance are largely unaffected by fiber length; however, reinforcement
increases with length, allowing formulators to engineer strength without
impacting thixotropy. Other factors such as moisture level and degree of
fibrillation also affect fiber performance in coatings. For waterborne
coatings, wet versions of the pulp provide improved dispersion and application
properties. When reinforcement is desired with minimal effect on viscosity,
short fibers are recommended.
Inorganic Thickeners (also see
Organoclays)
Clays
Clays can be discussed as follows:
A. Swelling
(smectite) – Smectite refers to a family of layered silicate clays that undergo an
increase in effective volume during incorporation in the coating. These clays
have a unique structure that allows them to swell in water and form stable gel
structures that impart various physical, performance and rheological
properties. Despite these advantages, the smectite clays pose some challenges.
They must be pre-dispersed with high shear to use them effectively. Improper
dispersion can cause high levels of post thickening, and loss of key
performance characteristics. Additionally, the water demand of the clay during
the pre-gel phase can be excessive, reducing the feasibility in higher solids
systems.
(1) Bentonite – (colloidal clay, colloidal
hydrated aluminum silicate). The primary component of this clay is
montmorillonite (Al2Si4O24H4•nH2O).
Other components include quartz, feldspar and pyrites. The crystal structure of
bentonite contains aluminum and magnesium in the lattice. The montmorillonite
type provides superior viscosity build and suspension.
(2) Hectorite – similar chemically to
bentonite containing montmorillonite as the primary component, and quartz,
feldspar and pyrites. Its crystal lattice contains magnesium and lithium in the
crystal lattice in place of aluminum and magnesium. Hectorite is often used in
the more demanding coatings such as automotive because it provides
extraordinary thixotropy. This in turn provides improved sag, metallic pigment
orientation and appearance as well as improvement in the application
window.
Smectite clay minerals give excellent rheological properties to solvent
and waterborne systems. The benefits stem from the three key properties of
smectites: particle size, particle shape and particle charge.
Smectites are platey crystals with large aspect ratios and high surface area.
The face dimension ranges from about 0.2 to 1 micron across the widest part.
The edges are less than 10 angstroms thick. They are irregular in shape. The
interior of the crystal is negatively charged while the edges are positive at
low to neutral pH. Ions of opposite charge are attracted to the face and edge,
but due to the large face to edge ratio, the net charge of the crystal is
negative.
The polyionic nature of the natural smectite is the basis for the mineral’s
ability to gel aqueous systems. The smectite come to us from nature in packets
of platelets, or aggregates. The aggregates are readily wet by water and large
aggregates disperse initially into smaller aggregates. Upon shear conditions,
the crystals will disperse to their primary particle size. This dispersion, in
aqueous systems is governed in part by the ionic, or electrolytic,
concentration of the water medium. Under appropriate electrolytic concentrations,
due to osmotic pressure, the sodium ions will diffuse away from the crystal
surface, forming the electronic double layer forms. Under low shear conditions,
the oppositely charged face and edge of the particles will align and the gel
structure is formed. These are weak bonds, so upon shear the bonds break and
the system becomes shear thinning. Release the shear, and the viscosity builds
again based on realignment of the particles. For any smectite-based system,
whether water or solvent, two conditions must exist: dispersion of particles
from their natural aggregate form, and particle-to-particle
interaction.
In solventborne systems, the gelation
mechanism is a bit different. The two key criteria, dispersion and interaction,
are still necessary, but the interaction bonding is through the exposed
hydroxyl groups on the edge of the crystals. Well before the application,
however, the smectite must be modified from its natural, water-wetting state,
to be compatible in solvent systems, or oil wetting. The counter ions on the
surface of the smectite were sodium. Another name for these counter ions is
exchangeable cations, because that is just what they can do – exchange with
other cations such as a long chain organic cation, rendering the surface oleophilic.
The cation may be from a quaternary ammonium salt, such as dioctadecyl dimethyl
ammonium chloride. The ion exchange is a hydroprocess and after the organically
modified crystal is dried, aggregates of platelets are formed. Just as in the
waterborne system, these aggregates must be well dispersed prior to gelation.
After dispersion, at low shear, particle-to-particle bonding ensues, but this
time through hydrate bonding at the edge hydroxyl sites. This hydrogen bonding
is weak, so when shear is increased, the bonds break and shear thinning
follows.
Clays rely on hydrogen bonding to establish a network structure. To a
large extent, the efficiency of these materials as rheology control agents
depends on adequate dispersion of the additive. The greater the amount of
surface area available for hydrogen bonding, the greater will be the strength
of the structure.
The structural and chemical properties of the smectite lead to many benefits:
anti-settling, improved hold out, pigment spacing, pigment extension, improved
wet edge, sag resistance, and improved flow and leveling.
Clays are often used with organic thixotropes and antisettling additives. The
organic thixotropes provide excellent flow and leveling properties but are very
temperature sensitive. That is why they function so well together with the
organoclays, which are not temperature sensitive. It is important to keep the
level of organoclay use to a minimum because it will cause a loss of gloss.
Excessive levels can also affect adhesion.
While some recent modifications to organoclay products have created more easily
dispersible types, many products still require the preparation of pregels and
the use of polar additives. Particular care must be taken when incorporating
organoclays with low-to-moderate shear dispersers into unpigmented systems. The
addition of organoclays to solventborne coating systems contributes to reduced
gloss due to the oil absorption effects of organoclay.
B.
Non-Swelling Clays
These clays swell either very little or not at all.
(1)
Kaolin (china clay) Al2O3·2SiO2·2H2O
Kaolin is the common name for products comprised of the aluminum silicate clay
mineral Kaolinite. It is a non-swelling clay that has a platelet structure in
which layers of alumina octahedral are joined to layers of silica rings through
shared oxygen atoms. When well formed, kaolin platelets have a hexagonal
structure with an oxygenated surface on one side and a hydrophilic hydroxyl
surface on the other side. When used in coatings, the optical properties that
contribute to opacity are more important than any physical property
improvements. The clay is hydrophilic in nature and readily dispersible in
water. Surface treatments are used to improve its dispersibility in organic
media.
There are various grades of kaolin, with ‘hydrous clay’ and ‘calcined clay’
being the common types used in the coating industry. Hydrous clay is basically
an unmodified product that is prepared by a water-washing process in which
impurities are removed and specific particle size fractions are obtained. The
refined clays may be further treated to improve brightness by chemical
bleaching and/or or magnetic fields to remove iron and titanium impurities.
Typically water-washed kaolin is used in interior and exterior latex and alkyd
coatings, E-coat primers, and wood primers.
When water-washed kaolin is delaminated by attrition milling of large particle
fractions, it is known as ‘delaminated clay’. The milling breaks down the
stacks of kaolin platelets into thin individualized plates, which improves
barrier, brightness and opacity properties of the clay. Delaminated kaolin clay
is used in exterior house paints including porch and deck enamels, interior
wall and ceiling coatings, and stain-blocking primers.
When kaolin clay is dry-ground and air-separated to control particle-size
distribution and further reduce impurities, it is known as ‘airfloat’ clay.
Such clay does not have the color and is more abrasive than water-washed clay
and is not widely used in the coatings industry.
Calcined kaolin clay is prepared by
thermally treating water-washed and bleached kaolin at about 650 to 700 °C.
Higher temperatures are used if highly refined products are desired. This
process removes structural hydroxyl groups and forms amorphous ‘metakaolin’,
which has improved brightness, oil absorption, and opacity. Calcined clay is
used in interior alkyd and latex coatings, interior primers, and exterior
acrylic paints.
Other types of kaolin clays include chemically treated versions in which
the treatment improves dispersibility in aqueous systems, treatment with
stearates or silanes to improve dispersibility in organic media, and treatment
alkaline silicates to further improve optical properties. The later type are
referred to as ‘structured’ kaolin clay and mainly used in interior paints.
Other surface treatments are used for products used in high-solids polyester
baking enamels, marine coatings and two-package polyurethane
enamels.
(2)
Mica
Mica is a term used for a group of silicates that have a varied chemical
structure, but that have similar atomic structure and physical properties. They
all have excellent cleavage properties and can be split into thin, flexible
sheets. They all have hydroxyl functionality and are silicates of aluminum and
an alkali metal such as potassium, sodium or lithium. Natural color varies and
mica that is transparent, black, brown, gray, green, rose-red, violet or yellow
can be found with the color depending on metallic
impurities.
The most common form of mica is the mineral Muscovite (white mica), which is a
non-swelling, hydrated potassium aluminum silicate, 3Al2O3·K2O·6SiO2·2H2O.
In a wet- or dry-ground form, mica is, or has been, used in the coating
industry for decorative purposes in paints, wallpaper, water- and oil-based
artists’ colors, and certain printing operations. In 2002, the paint industry
accounted for 15% or almost 15,000 metric tons of the ground mica produced. It
is used as a pigment extender and suspension aid and to reduce chalking,
decrease shrinking and shearing, improve the resistance of dry paint films to
water penetration, promote adhesion, and improve the brightness of colored pigments.
Overall, the paint industry is the second largest user of ground mica. The
largest user is the tape-joint compound industry segment where almost 60,000
metric tons were consumed in 2002. In this industry mica acts as a
filler/extender, improves smoothness, and improves the resistance to
cracking.
China clay (kaolin) and mica, which are basically non-swelling types of clays,
are used primarily as extender pigments. Kaolin differs from both bentonite and
attapulgite because its particles range from colloidal size to 5-10 mm in
diameter. It is a very white and platey mineral that accounts for its
desirability as a pigment. Although these are not used as thickeners, they do
provide some body to systems, particularly at low pH or for highly pigmented systems.
(3)
Colloidal interaction network
These clays function by a mechanical entanglement and absorption
mechanism. Typical of such clays is the mineral attapulgite, (Mg,Al)5Si8O22(OH)4·4H2O.
An important type of thickener that is very useful in paint formulating is the
colloidal inorganic, clay-like mineral thickener called attapulgite. It has a
variable composition that consists mainly of hydrous magnesium aluminum
silicates with traces of calcium, iron, potassium, sodium, titanium and
manganese oxides. Attapulgite products are sold under a variety of trade names
such as Attagel®, MIN-U-GEL®, EZ GEL, and so on. Typically, attapulgite is
dried, milled and separated into specific particle size ranges for sale. It may
or may not be formulated with other products depending on the particular end
use.
Attapulgite products are one of the least expensive and commonly used
co-thickeners. They provide thixotropic thickening to waterborne and solvent
formulations used in paint, adhesives, inks, sealants and other liquid
products. Their function is to reduce the amount of sag and prevent settling of
pigments and other materials. Many formulators combine attapulgite clays with
hydroxypropyl methylcellulose. They are also used in conjunction with HEURS to
control syneresis.
Electron microscopy indicates that attapulgite exists as randomly oriented
single units and bundles of needles and/or laths that are crystalline in
nature. The shape and random nature of the structure leads to high absorptivity
and porosity of the mineral, which are characteristics that lead to easy
wettability in liquid systems.
This inorganic mineral is essentially inert and non-swelling in aqueous
applications. It is the network of myriads of finely dispersed colloidal
particles that cause these thickeners to develop their desirable properties,
which include liquid separation (syneresis) control, pigment suspension,
thixotropic thickening, spatter resistance, good film build and sag control, and
improved hiding and tint strength in coatings. The impartment of thixotropy to
coatings allows them to appear gelled (high viscosity) when at rest and yet
become thin (low viscosity) when agitation or shear is
applied.
Attapulgite-based thickeners are popular because they are easy to use and the
powder can be added to the ‘grind’ or high-shear phase of formula preparation.
No dispersants are needed in aqueous applications, but appropriate surfactants
are added to impart thixotropic characteristics to oil-based
products.
Fumed Silica
Fumed silica is referred to as fumed silicon dioxide and is produced by
the vapor phase hydrolysis of silicon tetrachloride in a hydrogen oxygen
flame.
Degussa’s Dr. Klopfer discovered fumed silica in 1940 while searching for
highly active, light-colored filler pigments to replace carbon black in rubber
formulations. In 1941, Degussa scientists successfully completed the
high-temperature hydrolysis of silicon tetrachloride in an oxy-hydrogen flame
to produce fumed silica. Most commercial grade fumed silica contains reacted
organophilic groups on the silica surface.
Fumed silica forms extensive ‘networks’ or ‘structures’ in coatings systems by
virtue of its ability to hydrogen bond via the silanol groups. Silica relies on
the ability to create relatively large particle chains (structures) by
establishing an association between particles of similar chemistry. Proper
incorporation of the fumed silica is essential to provide adequate dispersion
and maximum surface area, yet prevent destroying the particle chains by
mechanical separation and solvation of the discreet silica particles. As with
organoclays, fumed silica also exhibits oil absorption and lowers the gloss of
a solventborne coatings system. The density of fumed silica is very low so
dusting and handling concerns are a factor for
consideration.
Cab-O-Sil® fumed silica is generally considered unique because of its extremely
small particle size and its enormous surface area. This is why it is an
excellent rheology-control agent for numerous applications.
The surface chemistry of fumed silica is important because of its ability to
thicken non-polar and semi-polar systems. During the formation of Cab-O-Sil,
hydroxyl groups become attached to some of the silicon atoms on the particle
surface. This makes the fumed silica surface hydrophilic and capable of
hydrogen bonding with suitable molecules of materials in vapor, liquid or solid
form. The ability of this fumed silica to adsorb moisture is one of the
properties that makes it an excellent free-flow agent for lumpy or hygroscopic
solids.
Three groups should be noted: isolated hydroxyl groups, hydrogen bonded
hydroxyl groups and the siloxane group. The isolated hydroxyl groups attached
to surface silicon atoms are hydrophilic. So also are the hydrogen-bonded
hydroxyl groups attached to silicon atoms hydrophilic. The siloxane group is
non-polar and accounts for the hydrophobic characteristics of that part of the silica
surface.
When heated above 110 ˚C, the surface undergoes reversible dehydration. This is
restored by exposure to humidity.
Because the surface hydroxyls form hydrogen
bonds, they form a network of silica. Rheology control is dependent on this
tendency of the aggregates to link together through hydrogen bonding. The
network increases the viscosity of the system and produces thixotropic
behavior. Thixotropic behavior is the time-dependent recovery of viscosity
after shearing. The addition of fumed silica results in this behavior because
the shear forces from mixing are able to break the inter-aggregate hydrogen
bonds, causing the apparent viscosity of the system to drop. The apparent
viscosity will decrease in proportion to the length of time of mixing or the
intensity of the mixing. Once the shear force has been removed, the bonds
rebuild over time and the viscosity approaches its original
value.
A major determinant of the effect of fumed silica in a system is the
nature of the liquid phase of the system. Network formation is determined to a
large degree by the ability of the liquid to form hydrogen bonds. Common
solvents within the coatings industry vary from highly polar (water) which are
apt to readily form hydrogen bonds to non-hydrogen bonding
solvents.
It is in the non-hydrogen bonding systems that Cab-O-Sil fumed silica displays
its greatest efficiency in rheology control. The silica particle has no choice
but to hydrogen bond with the silica particles and the greatest degree of
network formation is achieved at the lowest concentration of silica.
Concentrations of 3-6% fumed silica by weight are usually sufficient to provide
gel formation in these systems. In highly hydrogen bonding systems, the
interference with the silica-to-silica bonding from the medium is very
prominent. In this case a larger concentration of silica will be required to
produce a given increase in viscosity and thixotropy.
Fumed silica is sometimes dry blended into protective powder coatings up to
2-3% by weight to aid in fluidizing the powder during application. The silica
also acts as a thixotrope, reducing flow-out when the powder melts on a hot
melt surface.
Hydrophobic fumed silica used with anticorrosive pigments can improve the anticorrosion
properties of waterborne systems as well as solvent systems. Hydrophobic fumed
silica is made by processing fumed hydrophilic silica through an in-line
hydrophobic treatment. Treatments can vary from silanes, siloxanes or
silazanes.
Examples of types of hydrophobic fumed silica:
- dimethyldichlorosilane
(DMDS);
- trimethoxyoctylsilane
(TMOS);
- silicone oil (SO);
and
- hexamethyl-disilazane
(HMDS).
Hydrophilic and hydrophobic fumed silicas are used in solventborne coatings to
improve rheological properties, and as flow control agents and anti-settling
additives for pigments.
Because of the silanol groups, these structures can now undergo a large degree
of hydrogen bonding and create large particle chains and
structures.
Aqueous Fumed Silica
Aqueous fumed silica dispersions are a new form of a well-known,
long-standing additive that can improve a variety of performance additives in
waterborne coatings. Its liquid, water-like form overcomes the challenges of
powder versions of fumed silica. As an anti-settling agent, fumed silica
dispersions are efficient, show good flow and leveling, improved heat age
stability, improved matting in matte systems, improved Konig hardness in
water-based coatings.
The aqueous fumed silica dispersions can lower VOCs as they are solvent and
surfactant free and, by improving film formation, they offer the possibility of
reducing co-solvent with a number of acrylic resins. Performance enhancements
include improved sag resistance, reduced cracking in highly filled systems, and
improved film hardness along with reduced dirt pick-up and film
tack.
Overbased Calcium Sulfonate
Gels
These gels are a complex matrix of colloidal calcium carbonate in the
calcite crystalline form stabilized by dispersants. Overbasing is a way to
provide a colloidally stable form of basicity in an organic medium. In
overbased calcium sulfonate gels, the basic component undergoes a change in
crystalline structure to act as a substrate from which alkali metal sulfonate
dispersant hydrophobes project. The polar heads of the dispersant associate
with the ionic calcite crystal flocs, providing colloidal
stability.
The projection and interaction of the nonpolar hydrocarbon dispersant tails via
van der Waals forces result in a stable, completely wetted-out gelled
structure. When incorporated into solventborne coatings, overbased calcium
sulfonates impart a recoverable shear-thinning structure that assists in
pigment suspension and antisag properties.
These products are incorporated at the pigment-dispersion stage of the
manufacturing process. They do not require heat activation or polar activators.
Minimum viscosity increase occurs in the “package feel” shear rate area;
therefore, overbased calcium sulfonates are highly desired for use in
high-solids formulations. The high temperatures encountered in curing
solventborne-baking systems do not affect these products. Since they are pre-gelled,
overbased calcium sulfonates do not affect the gloss of coating
systems.
Organic Thixotropes
Organic thixotropes include the category of cellulosics and acrylics
described above under non-associative thickeners that interact with the water
phase. There are other organic thixotropes as well that consist of products of
various types of chemical modifications of castor oil and carboxylic acid and
amines.
Castor oil derivatives are produced by modifying the castor oil by processes
such as sulfonation, hydrogenation and esterification with polyols. The
structure resulting from the use of castor oil derivatives is an artifact of
polar bonding (hydrogen bonding).
These attractive forces exist between the
pendant hydroxyl groups on the castor oil derivative and the similarly polar
species on resins, pigments with bound water, other additives and solvents in
the coating system. It is typically recommended that these products be
incorporated by various processing techniques such as heat activation and the
use of pregels to enhance the dispersibility of the products into the coating
system.
Castor oil derivatives have been shown to be ineffective in coating
systems cured by oven baking due to the required heat activation. If overheated
during paint manufacture, these same products can form seeds that are very
difficult if not impossible to re-incorporate by normal process equipment.
Castor oil derivatives can cause gloss reduction in solventborne coatings due
to their ability to isolate vehicles and solvents.
Polyamides are produced by raw materials and reaction conditions that produce
high-molecular-weight, waxy solids with minimal terminal amide (reactive)
functionality. This configuration results in a structure that usually exhibits
a low amine value and good stability in formulated coating
systems.
Polyamides create a structure by swelling in the solvents used in the coating
systems. This increases molecular volume and chain entanglement, substantially
increasing viscosity. These structures are weakly associated, and the
attractive forces are disrupted under applied stress during mixing, spraying
and other similar forces found in high-stress environments. This results in
reduced viscosity.
Polyamides require high shear incorporation, and some products require heat
activation. Studies of the surface chemistry of primers containing polyamides
have shown that the migration of these products to the surface of a coating is
responsible for sporadic intercoat adhesion failures of topcoats subsequently
applied to polyamide containing primers.
Other Types of Thickeners
Organo titanates, such as triethanolamine titanate, are also sometimes
used at very low levels to achieve even higher levels of structure than
obtainable with cellulosic colloids alone. The level has to be determined
dependent on the cellulosic/surfactant system used.
Metallic soaps such as aluminum stearates, octoates and calcium linoleate pulps
have been used as thickeners for solventborne coatings. They develop a gel
structure with the solvent.
A hydroxypropyl guar, which is a propylene oxide-modified polysaccharide, can
be used as a thickener for waterborne systems. Chemically the polysaccharide is
guar gum, which is a molecular chain comprised of beta-1,4-linked
anhydromannose units with single galactose units linked alpha-1,6 to every
other mannan unit in the main chain.
Xanthan gum is a naturally occurring polysaccharide that is a very good
thickening and stabilizing additive for low-solvent, aqueous-based coatings and
related products. In this environment, xanthan gum solutions exhibit
pseudoplastic flow and have very good suspension characteristics. [Note:
pseudoplastic systems have shear thinning characteristics and exhibit high
viscosity at low shear rates and low viscosity at high shear rates.] It also
aids in preventing skinning and in preventing paint ‘streaking’ or slumping
when applied. Xanthan gum, a polysaccharide that is rendered soluble through
pyruvate and acetate substituted trisaccharide side chains, is produced by
fermentation of the bacterium Xanthomonas campestris. The bacterium that forms
xanthan gum is found in particular green vegetables. In these vegetables, it
protects the bacterial colony from arid conditions and resulting dryness. The
polymer has a stiff rod-like structure rather than a random coil in solution
associated with most natural polysaccharides, a characteristic that gives it
its unusual rheological properties. Xanthan gum is used in color-pigment
dispersions, exterior fence paints, low-solvent emulsion paints, silicate
paints, stucco coatings, and thickened chloride/water paint strippers. It is
used at relatively low levels of about 0.05% to about 1% with the higher
percentage used in thick coatings, such as are involved in stucco coatings, to
prevent sag.
THIXOTROPES (BODYING AGENTS)
See Thickeners
These are additives used to impart thixotropy to a coating. A
thixotropic system is one that exhibits a time-dependent decreasing viscosity
or shear stress at a constant shear rate. When the shearing force is
eliminated, the viscosity returns over a period of time to its original
‘at-rest’ value. Fumed silica is often the additive of choice to control and
increase viscosity and thixotropy because it is very
efficient.
Some of the surface silicon atoms in fumed silica bear hydroxyl groups that are
capable of forming hydrogen bonds between other fumed silica aggregates. This
forms a network of silica when a sufficient concentration of fumed silica is
dispersed in most liquid systems. The rheological control of fumed silica in
liquids depends on the tendency of its aggregates to hydrogen
bond.
It is this network that then in turn
increases the viscosity of the system and produces thixotropic behavior or the
time-dependent recovery of viscosity after shearing. This behavior occurs
because the shear forces from mixing are able to break the inter-aggregate
hydrogen bonding and cause the viscosity of the system to decrease. Then once
the shear force is removed the hydrogen bonding will reform and the viscosity
build increase.
In dry powders the use of fumed silica imparts free flow and anti-caking
properties. The submicron particle size of the fumed silica allows it to move
easily between materials. It may in fact form a layer on the surface of larger
particles and behave as tiny ball bearings.
TOUGHENING AGENTS
Fusion-bonded-epoxy (FBE) powder coatings are used worldwide where
long-term corrosion protection is critical such as on oil, gas and water
pipelines. These coatings must survive pipe manufacture and process demands as
well as field performance at various temperatures. Increasing the toughness of
these coatings can improve corrosion protection.
Many approaches have been used to toughen epoxy systems, often in composite
applications, where toughening agents act through various mechanisms to
dissipate an applied load. Liquid rubbers, core-shell particles, glass beads,
and thermoplastic-modified epoxies, and various combinations of these, are
among the toughening agents used.
Complications with these products may include significantly increasing the
viscosity of formulations containing them, a dependence of the morphology on
cure kinetics, the necessity of vigorous mixing to disperse the modifiers or
the addition of further additives to prevent particle
agglomeration.
Other toughening methods involve the use of completely immiscible or pre-formed
modifiers, such as thermoplastics or core-shell rubbers. These can be difficult
to evenly disperse in epoxy formulations or can cause significant increases in
the viscosity of a formulation. However, they typically do not decrease the Tg
of the cured product.
Block copolymers are used to enhance the performance of FBE powder coatings in
terms of improved flexibility and impact resistance while still maintaining the
ability to provide corrosion protection. Block copolymers function by creating
second phase morphologies and not by acting as compatibilizers for various
components in the FBE.
An important attribute of any coating powder is its ability to flow before its
gels. Most thermoplastics or core-shell particles used as toughening agents
increase the melt viscosity of the epoxy resin, and hence the flowability of
the coating powder is reduced causing adhesion problems due to the poor surface
coverage.
Block copolymer toughening technology can be used to dramatically enhance the
flexibility and impact resistance of FBE coatings without compromising other
key properties such as Tg, flowability and corrosion protection. In doing so,
this novel technology has broken the conventional Viscosity-Tg-Toughness paradigm,
in which toughenability often comes at a large penalty to viscosity and Tg of
the cured product.
TRIBO-CHARGING ADDITIVE
There are two techniques to apply powder onto a substrate. The major one
in North America is the corona process, where the sprayed powder particles are
forced through an electrical field to become negatively charged. The charged
particles are attracted and deposited on the grounded object to be painted,
which is generally a metallic substrate. The second application is the
tribo-static process where the particles are forced through a Teflon tube and
are charged positively by friction with the tube walls. The tribo charging
process provides more uniform and thinner layers and less overspray. Depending
on their composition tribo-static powders require additives to improve their
chargeability. Certain hindered amine light stabilizers (HALS) improve
tribo-charging in addition to their radiation stabilization properties. Even
very low concentrations of HALS, especially in hybrid systems, can
significantly increase the tribo-value of various powder systems.
UV ABSORBERS AND LIGHT STABILIZERS
See Hindered Amine Light Stabilizers,
Nanotechnology
Materials that preferentially absorb UV radiation in a coating and
transform the UV energy into longer wavelength energy. Chemical compositions
that protect the coating film, transparent or semi-transparent films, and the
substrate from photo-degradation.
The ultraviolet region of the electromagnetic spectrum extends from about 100
to 400 nanometers. It contains the following regions:
- Ultraviolet A: 320 to
400 nanometers (used for photocuring);
- Ultraviolet B: 280 to
320 nanometers (used for photocuring and causes ‘sunburn’);
- Ultraviolet C: ~15 to
280 nanometers (usually used for sterilization purposes).
Many radiation sources emit ultraviolet wavelengths to some degree. The sun
emits very strongly throughout the ultraviolet region, and even though it is
only a portion of the total energy reaching the earth, it is the radiation that
is particularly harmful to exterior coatings. Ultraviolet radiation is
sufficiently energetic to break covalent bonds in polymer structures that hold
a coating film together. This energy decreases as wavelength increases and is
about 140 kilocalories at 200 nanometers and 70 kilocalories at 400
nanometers.
Coatings are not only protective or functional; they also provide decorative
effects that are aesthetically pleasing. In either case they must withstand
environmental influences and possible subsequent damage. This means that
coatings have to be able to withstand deterioration and/or failure of any sort.
Ultraviolet radiation is often responsible for polymer degradation in a
coating. This radiation, coupled with moisture and various other air pollutants
such as acid rain, can quickly cause the degradation of an organic film if it
is not adequately protected.
The polymeric binder in the coating film is
subject to attack by ultraviolet radiation because of its organic nature. When
a polymer readily absorbs ultraviolet radiation, and this is the usual case,
regions in the polymer are activated to a higher energy state and free radicals
can be formed. When these radicals are formed, the degradation process has
begun.
Certain polymers have chromophores as a part of the chemical structure
of the polymer-aromatic-group containing polymers in particular. These readily
absorb radiation. However, even the binder polymers that do not contain
chromophores as a part of their polymer structure end up being formulated and
cured in a system that contains crosslinking agents, pigments, fillers,
extenders, catalysts, flow-control agents, biocides and other ingredients that will
absorb radiation and thus can lead to degradation. Merely because chromophores
exist in the molecular structure and ultraviolet radiation is absorbed, it does
not mean that bond breakage and degradation will occur. It only means that the
potential for degradation exists.
Sunlight, oxygen and water all work together to cause coating degradation of
the polymer. In the process free radicals are formed that react with
atmospheric oxygen to generate peroxy radicals. These very quickly form
hydroperoxides, which in turn generate a radical on the polymer backbone
itself. The weak hydroperoxide will cleave easily in the presence of heat and
sunlight and produce more radicals. As this process occurs, the polymers
mechanical and chemical structure is slowly degraded and broken down. We
usually see this in the form of peeling, flaking, chalking and
fading.
Absorption and degradation are very complicated processes. For purposes of
simplicity here we can look at the process as follows:
Polymer-R absorbs ultraviolet radiation to generate a photoexcited state:
Polymer-R*
Excited Polymer-R* —-> Polymer-R•
free radical
Free Radical Polymer-R• + O2 —-> Polymer-ROO• a peroxy radical
The peroxy radical then abstracts a hydrogen from a molecule, R-H, in the
system that has an available hydrogen to form Polymer-ROOH and R•, a new free
radical. Then the process continues.
All of the commercial UV absorbers (UVAs) and stabilizers that we use as
additives act on one of the above processes. The UV absorbers prevent the
excitation state by absorbing the UV radiation that would produce it. Absorbers
today have good thermal stability and some have the capability of being
crosslinked to the coating polymer. UV absorbers are designed such that they
preferentially absorb UV radiation, dissipate the absorbed energy and do not
cause degradation of the polymeric film.
UV absorbers are incorporated into organic films that are subjected to exterior
exposures. Their function is to absorb incoming UV radiation and dissipate the
energy before it can be absorbed by the polymer in the coating. This action has
to continue to occur over the lifetime of the coating. The most important UV
absorbers are: 2-(2´-hydroxyphenyl) benzotriazoles, 2-hydroxyphenyltriazines,
2-hydroxybenzophenones, cyanoacrylates, salicylates, and oxanilides. The
benzotriazoles and triazines have excellent spectral coverage, high extinction
coefficients, and excellent photo-permanence. Recent UVA developments have
focused on increasing molecular weight and/or adding functionality, which
minimizes migration out of the coating, improvements on increasing extinction
coefficients and photo-permanence and designing encapsulation techniques which
facilitate waterborne systems without the need for solvents or
pre-emulsification.
UV absorbers compete for the incoming UV radiation with the polymer itself. The
more effective the use of UV absorbers in an exterior coating, the less prone
the coating will be to the visual effects of UV degradation such as chalking,
loss of gloss etc. UV absorbers depend on the thickness of the coating to be
effective. The thinner the coating, the less effective they are. UV absorbers
are even more effective when used in combination with Hindered Amine Light
Stabilizers. [See HALS for more information on these
additives.]
For coatings used in exterior environments the combination of UV
absorbers and hindered amine light stabilizers (HALS) is effective in reducing
the damaging effects of ultraviolet radiation.
The development of new reactive HALS and UVAs can meet needs for improved
compatibility in polar coatings as well as reduced migration. In addition, work
continues on development of high-purity powder forms that are also ideal for
use in the powder coatings.
These systems are compatible with highly polar, highly crosslinked systems such
as polyester (or acrylic) urethanes and melamines. A non-reactive HALS – or
NOR-HALS – possesses a reactive hydroxy functionality enabling it to
co-condense with melamine and isocyanate crosslinkers. As a result, it exhibits
improved compatibility and migration resistance in many coatings systems. These
may be combined with other HALS that contain reactive hydroxy functionality to
achieve non-migrating systems. Potential applications include
coatings-over-plastic substrates (particularly polyurethanes), acid-catalyzed
clearcoats, clearcoats over acid-catalyzed basecoats and powder coatings.
The reactable HALS and UVAs react quickly,
are noninteracting and exhibit outstanding solubility, thermal permanence and
radiation stabilizing effectiveness. Their migration resistance makes them
attractive for use in wet-on-wet applications. There are also reactables with
low melting ranges for use in powder coating applications and UV/powder hybrid
applications.
In powder coatings, the purpose of UV absorbers is to reduce the rate of
polymer degradation due to the environmental exposure of UV radiation. The
chemistry is usually based on benzotriazole but can also be benzophenone based.
These materials absorb harmful UV radiation and convert it into low levels of
heat energy. The levels are usually 1.0-5.0% and they are normally used in
combination with a hindered amine light stabilizer.
Inorganic UV Absorbers
Titanium dioxide white pigments are designed by
their particle size for optimum light scattering in the visible region. For
high light refraction, a maximum refractive index is a prerequisite. However,
this is not sufficient – the particle size has to be fine-tuned as well. Unlike
standard-sized titanium dioxide pigments, ultra-fine titanium dioxides, which
were initially developed for transparent UV protection, ideally do not scatter
visible light. However, standard-size and ultra-fine titanium dioxides have the
same refractive index, so it is the finest particle size that is responsible
for the transparency of the coating. The finer the dispersed particles the more
transparent the coating. Thus, for transparent UV absorption the finest grades
in optimum dispersion are applied. It has to be noted as well, that certain
ultra-fine titanium dioxides grades with selected ‘intermediate’ primary
particle size do scatter blue light. This is why these nanosized TiO2
particles are used in metallic coatings and other pigmented systems in which
sophisticated color effects are desired.
Titanium
dioxide absorbs UV radiation and serves as a photo-semiconductor. This property
is practically independent from the particle size. Energy absorption leads to
the transfer of an electron from the valence band to the conduction band. This
process creates two mobile charged particles: the negatively charged electron
in the conduction band, and the positive charge (hole) in the valence band. UV
radiation is absorbed and transformed into thermal energy. However, unlike
organic substances, the chemically inert titanium dioxide does not decompose,
so that the long-term stability of the entire system is
increased.
In order to tame the UV radiation and prevent it from causing damage by forming
radicals, foreign ions such as trivalent aluminum (Al+3) are
incorporated into the inner crystal lattice of TiO2. In addition,
the surface of the pigment may be encapsulated with an inorganic coating
consisting of aluminum oxide (Al2O3) and/or silica (SiO2).
This stabilizing technology is generally used for photo-resistant and
weather-resistant white pigments and inorganic UV absorbers. Typical white pigments
have a crystallite size of 200 to 350 nm. They are available as anatase or
rutile pigments. The inorganic TiO2-based UV absorbers have a
primary particle size of 10 to 50 nm and are usually offered as rutiles with a
high-surface coating.
These surface coatings make it possible to modify not only the photoactivity
but also the optical and colloidal properties of the white pigment. It is also
a must to achieve good dispersibility of the ultra-fine titanium dioxides. For
this reason, the pigments are treated with an additional organic
substance.
There are two types of ultra-fine titanium dioxides in the rutile modification
(both containing > 99% rutile) that differ mainly in their primary crystal
size and doping. The type that was specially developed for transparent wood
coatings has a primary crystal size of ~10 nm and a specific surface of ~110 m2/g
(Mikrorutile 10 nm). The second product has a primary crystal size of 15 nm and
accordingly a smaller specific surface area of ~70 m2/g (Mikrorutile
15 nm).
Nano zinc oxide is also used as a UV absorber and adds to the improvement of
other coating properties.
Cerium Oxide Nanoparticles
Cerium oxide is largely used in the catalysis field (mainly for diesel
engines), and in chemical and mechanical polishing (CMP). However, cerium oxide
is also well known for its optical properties and ability to filter UV rays.
Stable sols of cerium oxide nanoparticles with diameters of 10 nm are
available. These sols appear as a clear liquid, since the particles are small
enough to be totally transparent.
Despite their small size, cerium oxide
nanoparticles are very effective in terms of UV filtration. According to
theory, cerium oxide shows a UV cut-off threshold at around 370 nm, similar to
that of nano titanium oxide. Cerium oxide and titanium oxide are both
semi-conductors (with a band gap around 3.0 - 3.2 eV) and present the same
classical UV absorption mechanism: under UV-light illumination, the absorption
of a photon with a higher energy than the band gap creates an electron-hole
pair.
In the case of titanium oxide, these holes and electrons migrate to the
surface of the particles (rather than recombining together inside the
particles). When holes and electrons are at the surface, they can react with
oxygen, water or hydroxyls to form free radicals. These free radicals are
oxidant entities, and can cause the degradation of organic molecules, in
particular polymers, which is an important issue for protective coatings.
In contrast, cerium oxide absorbs UV without being photoactive. Indeed, cerium
oxide has a localized electron (4 f orbital), while titanium oxide has
less localized electrons than cerium oxide (3 d orbital). So the
cerium-oxygen bonding is more ionic than the titanium-oxygen bonding and,
logically, the charge carriers (holes and electrons centers) creation is lower
than in the case of titanium oxide. Moreover, cerium oxide shows a very fast
recombination of charge carriers before they can migrate to the surface
(because of crystal defects, oxido-reduction reaction) so there is no further
creation of free radicals. Due to the combination of these two phenomena,
cerium oxide does not show any photocatalytic effect.
Cerium oxide nanoparticles, properly dispersed in coating formulations, combine
the advantages of organic ultraviolet (UV) absorbers with those of mineral
additives. The cerium oxide nanoparticles ensure the durability of the UV
absorption function while improving the hardness and strengthening the organic
binders currently used in wood coating technology. Since the nanoparticles do
not scatter light, the coating remains transparent.
Transparency (i.e., no coloration, no
whitening) is an important requirement for the wood coating industry; since
wood is a natural material, the coating must be as neutral as possible. When
the durability is targeted, colored pigments are often added to help, but this
negatively impacts the aesthetics of the end product. Organic UV absorbers are
also efficient but their actions are limited because of progressive destruction
of active molecules (migration, leaching, photochemical
activity).
The surface mechanical properties
(hardness and scratch resistance) of a coating are clearly improved by cerium
oxide nanoparticles. The bulk characteristics of the organic host matrix are
also strongly modified in the presence of cerium oxide nanoparticles: tensile
strength, elongation-at-break or yield stress are significantly improved. The
homogeneous distribution of cerium oxide nanoparticles throughout the matrix
does not support the hypothesis of the formation of an inorganic surface
network to explain the reinforcement of the polymer film surface. Therefore, it
is probable that a modification of the structural organization of the polymer
chains around the particles occurs during the drying.
From a practical point of view, the improvement in mechanical properties
combined with the UV filter protection delays the occurrence of cracks, and
allows the coating to better follow the dimensional variations of the wood
piece due to moisture pick-up and swelling. Improved scratch resistance
contributes to better appearance and durability (e.g., the inhibition of
weaknesses and micro cracks due to handling).
The introduction of cerium oxide nanoparticles into the organic matrix results
in a significant modification of hydrophilic properties of the coating, leading
to an improvement in water resistance. The contact angle of a water droplet characterizes
the water resistance of a surface. This important parameter is significantly
increased upon addition of cerium oxide nanoparticles.
Organic UV Absorbers
The most common UV absorbers for coatings are 2-hydroxyphenyl benzotriazoles,
2-hydroxy-benzophenones, 2-hydroxy-phenyltriazines, and oxalanilides.
Salicylates, formamidines and cyanoacrylates may also be used on an individual
basis.
The photoprotection mechanism resides in the ability to form reversible intramolecular
hydrogen bonds between an o-hydroxyl group and a heteroatom such as nitrogen.
Upon absorption of UV-light, an electron is promoted to an excited singlet
state and, via intersystem crossing, to an excited triplet state. This is
followed by an excited state intramolecular proton transfer, or enolization,
with proton transfer taking place along the intramolecular hydrogen bond. The
quinonoid intermediate tautomerizes through a rapid non-radiative relaxation
process (heat) and return proton transfer, thus regenerating the original
ketone. This process, called the keto-enol tautomerism mechanism, is nothing
but a continuously repetitive proton transfer.
Due to the bathochromic shift of the absorption maximum toward the
long-wavelength spectrum, halogenated benzotriazoles are particularly suited
for the protection of photo-sensitive wood. The halogen substituent modifies
the electron density and expands the delocalized electron system. As a result,
less energy is required to bring the electrons into the excited state and the
absorption of radiation is shifted towards lower frequencies. In this case the
absorption maximum reaches the areas of the visible sunlight, thus more
efficiently protecting the substrate from the damaging effect of this type of radiation.
New mini-emulsion polymerization techniques have developed aqueous preparations
of hydrophobic UV absorbers, which enables easy incorporation and effective use
in waterborne coatings. The products can be added as supplied by simple stir-into
the formulations without any cosolvent at any stage of the manufacturing
process and are ideal for post addition. These products also allow dispersion
of hydrophobic substances into aqueous systems without separation problems upon
storage. The dispersed additive does not influence the optical properties of
clear coatings such as gloss and transparency. These products also show high
water leaching resistance and excellent long-term protection.
VISCOSITY MODIFIER
A material which, when added to a coating, has a measurable effect on
the rheological properties.
WATER-REMOVAL AGENTS/SCAVENGERS
See Moisture Scavenger
PTSI (p-toluenesulfonyl isocyanate) is a
low-viscosity reactive additive useful as a water scavenger in the formulation
of specialty urethane products such as coatings, adhesives and sealants. The
reaction of PTSI with water generates carbon dioxide and the corresponding
toluenesulfonamide, which is generally inert to further reaction with alkyl and
aryl isocyanates. The sulfonamide is usually soluble in common coating solvents
and presents no significant toxicity hazards. The reaction of PTSI with water
introduced from pigments and solvents in the paint formulation generates carbon
dioxide and soluble inert chemical products. Experience has demonstrated that
13 grams of PTSI effectively scavenges 1 gram of water, however compatibility
with the binder should always be tested.
PTSI
provides the formulator of specialty urethane products with an expedient and
efficient alternative to physical methods of dehydration in common use. It is
also recommended for the storage stabilization of purified diisocyanates
against deterioration or discoloration. It can be used for: moisture-curing
prepolymers, catalyzed prepolymers, prepolymer and polyol systems, urethane
alkyd production, and urethane lacquer production.
Both one- and two-part systems can be formulated with PTSI as a scavenger for
water introduced with solvents, pigments and fillers. The reactivity of PTSI
toward active hydrogen atoms makes it useful as a scavenger for water and other
isocyante reactive groups such as free acid in powdered aluminum alkanoates and
active hydrogen present in carbon black pigments, which cause polyurethane
coatings to thicken during storage.
Molecular sieves are also used as water scavengers. They are composed of
crystalline aluminosilicates that have cavities that are interconnected by
common openings or windows. Their function of water scavenging is independent
of temperature.
WAXES
See Slip Aids; Surface
Modifiers
The term ‘wax’ encompasses a large range of naturally occurring and
synthetic material made from high-fatty-acid esters (typically C36 –
C50) or from polymeric compounds (700 <10,000) that differ from fats in being harder and less greasy. It is,
however, important to realize that the chemical composition alone does not
determine a wax. The term wax is basically a generic term for materials that
have the following physical characteristics:
- solid at 20 °C,
varying in consistency from soft and plastic to brittle and
hard;
- a melting point of at
least 40 °C without decomposing, which distinguishes waxes from oils and natural
resins; and
- a relatively low
viscosity at temperature slightly above the melting point; non-stringing but
producing droplets. Droplet formation will exclude most low molecular weight
polymers.
There are a large variety of waxes available on the market, often classified
according to their origin. PP and PTFE although not being real waxes, are very
often associated with this class of surface-conditioner additives because of
the similar effects and performances they can provide.
WET EDGE EXTENDERS
These additives keep a film open or wet during a painting operation.
They allow lapping from an adjoining section or panel to newly painted
substrate. This is accomplished by controlling water evaporation rate through
the use of glycols, glycol ethers, polyoxyethylene glycols and certain
thickeners. Some extender pigments that have a high water demand are also
useful in this area though mainly by augmenting other compounds deliberately
added for this purpose. See also Retention
Aids.
WETTING AGENT
See Surfactant
Wetting agents are additives comprised of amphiphilic molecules that
improve the dispersion and/or adhesion process. Basically they are surfactants.
Wetting agents are used to lower the surface tension.
Substrate wetting is defined as the
replacement of adherent air at the substrate surface by a liquid coating. A
surface is said to be wetted if a liquid spreads over the surface evenly
without the formation of droplets. When the liquid is water and it spreads over
the surface without the formation of droplets, the surface is said to be hydrophilic.
In terms of energetics, this implies that the forces associated with the
interaction of water with the surface are greater than the cohesive forces
associated with bulk liquid water. Water droplets form on hydrophobic surfaces,
implying that cohesive forces associated with bulk water are greater than the
forces associated with the interaction of water with the
surface.
Practically, hydrophobicity and hydrophilicity are relative terms. A
simple quantitative method for defining the relative degree of interaction of a
liquid with a solid surface is the contact angle of a liquid droplet on a solid
substrate. If the contact angle of water is less than 30˚, the surface is
designated hydrophilic since the forces of interaction between water and the surface
nearly equal the cohesive forces of bulk water, and water does not cleanly
drain from the surface. If water spreads over a surface and the contact angle
at the spreading front edge of the water is less than 10°, the surface is often
designated as superhydrophilic, provided that the surface is not absorbing the
water, dissolving in the water or reacting with the water. On a hydrophobic
surface, water forms distinct droplets. As the hydrophobicity increases, the
contact angle of the droplets with the surface increases. Surfaces with contact
angles greater than 90° are designated as hydrophobic. The theoretical maximum
contact angle for water on a smooth surface is 120°.
Micro-textured or micro-patterned surfaces with hydrophobic asperities can exhibit
apparent contact angles exceeding 150° and are associated with
superhydrophobicity and the “lotus effect.”
While the contact angle of water on a substrate is a good indicator of the
relative hydrophobicity or hydrophilicity of a substrate, it is not a good
indicator for the wettability of the substrate by other liquids. Critical
surface tension is associated with the wettability or release properties of a
solid. It serves as a better predictor of the behavior of a solid with a range
of liquids.
Liquids with a surface tension below the critical surface tension (γc) of a
substrate will wet the surface, i.e., show a contact angle of 0 (cosUe
= 1). The critical surface tension is unique for any solid and is determined by
plotting the cosine of the contact angles of liquids of different surface
tensions and extrapolating to 1. The contact angle is given by Young’s
equation.
Hydrophilic behavior is generally observed by surfaces with critical surface
tensions greater than 45 dynes/cm. As the critical surface increases, the
expected decrease in contact angle is accompanied with stronger adsorptive
behavior and with increased exotherms associated with the
adsorption.
Hydrophobic behavior is generally observed by surfaces with critical surface
tensions less than 35 dynes/cm. At first, the decrease in critical surface
tension is associated with oleophilic behavior, i.e., the wetting of the
surfaces by hydrocarbon oils. As the critical surface tensions decrease below
20 dynes/cm, the surfaces resist wetting by hydrocarbon oils and are considered
oleophobic as well as hydrophobic.
Wetting is especially difficult on low-energy surfaces, i.e., substrates with
low surface energy or substrates contaminated by dirty particles or liquid
contaminants such as grease. If that occurs, wetting defects such as crazing,
crawling or poor adhesion may occur. When the surface energy of the substrate
is relatively high, wetting may become a critical factor if highly dynamic
application processes, such as a roller-coating application, are
involved.
Wetting may be improved by raising the surface energy of the substrate through
cleaning or by lowering the surface tension of the coating by using additives
designed for this purpose. For aqueous systems, a substrate-wetting additive is
a molecule having both a hydrophilic and a hydrophobic part. The additive’s
molecular structure determines that the orientation will drastically lower the
surface tension of the liquid. The non-polar area of the molecule rests airward
and the polar section of the molecule resets in the aqueous phase. Most polar
molecular parts contain either ionic substances or polyether segments. The
hydrophobic part is usually a specially selected polyhydrocarbon. Using
fluorinated groups or polysiloxane chains gives special
properties.
Low-molecular-weight silicone surfactants
such as tri- penta- or hexasiloxanes lower the static surface tension of
waterborne coatings better than hydrocarbon-based surfactants, and they are
more effective than higher molecular weight silicone-based surfactants. These
low-molecular-weight surfactants combine the strong reduction of static surface
tension with excellent spreading ability. They are ideal substrate-wetting
additives for coatings on difficult-to-wet substrates like plastics and metals.
They are outstanding at wetting the pores of wood
substrates.
In general, high-molecular-weight silicone surfactants provide good
static surface tension reduction, poor spreading ability and acceptable dynamic
surface tension reduction and foaming properties. Low-molecular-weight silicone
surfactants provide very good static surface tension reduction, very good
spreading ability and good dynamic surface tension reduction and foaming
properties. The non-ionic fluoropolymer surfactants provide outstanding static
surface tension reduction, acceptable spreading ability, but poor dynamic
surface tension reduction and foaming properties. Organic surfactants provide
good static surface tension reduction, acceptable spreading ability and
outstanding dynamic surface tension reduction and foaming properties. These
considerations are important in formulation.
Surface tension and interfacial tension once the coating is applied, are
determined by all components of the coating. Surface tension of resins can vary
from 57.6 dynes/cm for melamine resins to below 40 dynes/cm for acrylics and
alkyds. Solvents vary from 72.7 dynes/cm for water to 22 dynes/cm for VM&P
naphtha. It is important to realize that surface tension differences as low as
1-2 dynes/cm can give rise to defects such as craters.
Changes in surface tension as a coating dries, as well as differences across
the substrate, can cause the coating to flow from areas of low surface tension
to high surface tension. It is this flow that is the cause of most coating
defects. Many of these defects can often be eliminated by removal of
contaminants such as cutting oils, fingerprints or dirt from the
substrate.
There are two main approaches to counteract this surface tension driven flow.
The first is to reduce the overall surface tension and thus the differences
between high and low. (Note that the surface tension of a coating increases as
the solvents evaporate.) The second is to resist the flow by changing the
rheology – most commonly achieved by increasing the viscosity. This approach
has to be balanced with flow and leveling characteristics.
Defects that reduce the smoothness of a film, such as craters, pin holes,
orange peel, fish eyes, picture framing and crawling, are all caused by flow
due to surface tension differences. Many of these problems can be solved by
including a combination of additives to reduce the surface tension of the
coating. For example, several well-known companies provide organically modified
polysiloxanes with a wide range of surface tensions and compatibilities. Often
referred to as surface additives or wetting aids, these materials can provide
benefits at levels as low as 0.01%. It is important to note that high levels of
polysiloxanes can cause intercoat adhesion problems, but with the proper
guidance from the suppliers such issues can be avoided.
Raising the viscosity can be done by adding thixotropic thickeners or cellulose
esters. Thixotropic thickeners, such as organoclays, provide viscosity at low
or no shear. The viscosity will assist in reducing flows that can cause
defects, but the high viscosity can also create problems with flow and leveling
of the paint (e.g., leaving brush or roll marks).
Cellulose esters, on the other hand, are Newtonian in nature, and allow for
good flow and leveling as the paint is applied. They build viscosity very
rapidly upon evaporation of the solvent, and reduce or eliminate many potential
defects. In addition, their high glass transition temperatures, manifested by
rapid physical drying, reduce the time after application in which contaminants,
including overspray, can cause surface defects. Cellulose esters, specifically
cellulose acetate butyrates (CABs), are added at levels of 3-6% on resin
solids, and are often referred to as problem solvers.
XANTHAN GUM
See Thickeners
Xanthan Gum is a naturally occurring polysaccharide that is a very good
thickening and stabilizing additive for low-solvent, aqueous-based coatings and
related products. In this environment, xanthan gum solutions exhibit
pseudoplastic flow and have very good suspension characteristics. [Note:
pseudoplastic systems have shear thinning characteristics and exhibit high
viscosity at low shear rates and low viscosity at high shear rates.] It also
aids in preventing skinning and in preventing paint “streaking” or slumping
when applied. Xanthan gum, a polysaccharide that is rendered soluble through
pyruvate and acetate substituted trisaccharide side chains, is produced by
fermentation of the bacterium Xanthomonas campestris. The bacterium that forms
xanthan gum is found in particular green vegetables. In these vegetables, it
protects the bacterial colony from arid conditions and resulting dryness. The
polymer has a stiff rod-like structure rather than a random coil in solution
associated with most natural polysaccharides, a characteristic that gives it
its unusual rheological properties. Xanthan gum is used in color-pigment dispersions,
exterior fence paints, low-solvent emulsion paints, silicate paints, stucco
coatings, and thickened chloride/water paint strippers. It is used at
relatively low levels of about 0.05% to about 1% with the higher percentage
used in thick coatings, such as are involved in stucco coatings, to prevent
sag.
ZEOLITES
See Molecular Sieves
Zeolites are naturally occurring alumino-silicates.
In addition, raw material supplier literature was used, as well as
material taken directly from feature articles published in PCI.
While the PCI staff made every effort to
make sure this handbook is accurate, we may have inadvertently omitted
or misstated some information, and regret any errors.
|